(01.20) Owner’s manual Leon SEAT Leon SEAT · 2020-04-22 · want to give you valuable advice and...

Owner’s manualSEAT Leon

5FA012720BA

Ingl

és 5

FA01

2720

BA (

01.2

0)

SEA

T Le

on I

nglé

s (0

1.20)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.01.20

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 30, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed and digital instruction man-ualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information about the Infotain-ment system and it is available on SEAT's offi-cial website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 124

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 15

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 121

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 110

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 207

How do you refuel? ››› page 285

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 119

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 80

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 293

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 49

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 40

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 42

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 43

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 56

How do you change a light? ››› page 59

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 51

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 74

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 76

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels onthe steering wheel perform? ››› page 88

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 129

How do you drive in an economical and environ-mentally-friendly way? ››› page 216

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 295

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 298

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 301

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 300

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 314

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 320

Functions of interest

Infotainment System, Vehicle settings menu››› page 87

How does the START-STOP system work?››› page 203

What parking assistants are available?››› page 260

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 272

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 229

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 214

How does the lane departure warning systemwork? ››› page 239

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key-less Access)? ››› page 94

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 117

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 16How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 19Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Information, assistance and emergencycall service* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 48

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 128Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Net partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176voice control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 199Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

5

Table of Contents

Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro-file)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 229Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Lane departure warning (Side Assist) withrear cross traffic alert (RCTA) and dooropening warning (Exit Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 260Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . 260Parking aid parking and manoeuvring(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 272Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . 282Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Engine management and emissions controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 317Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Accessories and modifications to the ve-hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 325

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 328Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Indications about the technical data . . . . 334Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Fig. 2 Leon

Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 102– Emergency opening ››› page 106Fuel tank– Fuel capacity ››› page 334– Open/Close cap ››› page 285Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 100

1

2

3

– Central locking ››› page 91– Manual release ››› page 100Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 293– Open/close ››› page 293Levels control– Oil ››› page 295– Brake fluid ››› page 300

4

5

– Battery ››› page 302Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 54– Tow start ››› page 52Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 41– Wheel change ››› page 43

6

7

7


Exterior view

Fig. 3 Leon Sportstourer

Rear lid– Opening from outside– Emergency openingFuel tank– Fuel capacity– Open/Close capOpening and closing– Doors– Central locking

1

2

3

– Manual releaseBonnet– Unlocking lever– Open/closeLevels control– Oil– Brake fluid– BatteryTowing the vehicle

4

5

6

– Towline anchorage– Tow startAction in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit– Wheel change

7

8


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 106Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121Control for lighting and demisting win-dows ››› page 111Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Cruise control ››› page 219Warning lamps ››› page 80Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 119

1

2

3

4

5

6

Driver information system ››› page 78Infotainment System ››› page 83,››› page 153Open bonnet lever ››› page 293Fuses ››› page 56Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15Hazard warning lights ››› page 116Starter button ››› page 199Electronic parking brake ››› page 254Central locking ››› page 91

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

9


Overview (right hand drive)

Infotainment System ››› page 83,››› page 153Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 112Cruise control ››› page 219Warning lamps ››› page 80Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 119Driver information system ››› page 78Control for lighting and demisting win-dows ››› page 111

1

2

3

4

5

Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121Electric windows ››› page 106Open bonnet lever ››› page 293Starter button ››› page 199Central locking ››› page 91Electronic parking brake ››› page 254Hazard warning lights ››› page 116Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15Fuses ››› page 56

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

10


Interior view

Armrest ››› page 135Isofix anchors ››› page 32Headrest adjustment ››› page 124Seat belts ››› page 16Panoramic roof ››› page 108Interior mirror ››› page 121Seat adjustment ››› page 124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 25

8

11

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 128.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seatsalways have the headrests in the in-use po-sition ››› page 124.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the headrestsaccording to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 29.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 13.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 16.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

12

Safe driving

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front seats,● front airbags,● knee* and central* airbags for the driver● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rearchild seat system● height-adjustable front headrests,● rear headrests with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position ofvehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 4 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm(10 inches).

Fig. 5 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver andpassengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if a cor-rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend thefollowing positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head, oras close as possible to the same level as thetop of your head and under no circumstancesbelow eye level. Keep the back of your neckas close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 5.● Short people must lower the headrest com-pletely, even if your head is below its upperedge.● Tall people must raise the headrest com-pletely.● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion. »

1) Depending on the version/market.13

Safety

● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 19.

The following also applies to the driver:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the steering wheel so it is at least25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum››› Fig. 4 and you can hold it with both handson both sides, on the outer part, with yourarms slightly bent.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Move the seat in such a way that you canstep on the pedals with your knees slightlybent and with a distance between the kneesand the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-ches) ››› Fig. 4.● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sittingcloser than 25 cm, the airbag system cannotprotect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rearseats.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited for theirweight and height ››› page 29.● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the dashboard, for example, or out-

side the window. Otherwise the airbag andseat belt may offer insufficient protectionand also increase the risk of injury in theevent of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrectsitting positions substantially reduce the pro-tective function of seat belts and, therefore,increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-cially heightened when a deploying airbagstrikes a vehicle occupant who has assumedan incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-sponsible for all people, particularly children,inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor-rect sitting positions that could be dangerousfor all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.

14

Safe driving

● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Steering wheel position adjust-ment

Fig. 6 Lever in the lower left side of the steer-ing column.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip andonly when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 6 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 6 1 firmly upwards to en-sure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.

● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is inmotion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positionsto reduce injuries when the driver's frontairbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-paired to the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions. »

15

Safety

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 29.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 7 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis-play.

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 7 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt

16

Seat belts

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-onds. The indication can be hidden by press-ing the button on the dash panel.

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 8 Drivers with properly worn seat belts willnot be thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts of »

17

Safety

the buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 10 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv-er who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: themoment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Ina frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 9.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 10.

18

Seat belts

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 11 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt in-to the buckle.

Fig. 12 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly››› page 13.● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 11.● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 12. The latch plate is released from thebuckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-right position and the seat belt is worn cor-rectly, according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatalinjuries in the event of an accident or sud-den braking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

19

Safety

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and headrest posi-tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 14 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries only whenthey are properly positioned. Furthermore, ifthe webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-timum position to ensure the airbag providesthe maximum protection. The seat belt musttherefore always be worn and the webbingcorrectly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit-ting position of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or behindthe shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat beltmust lie evenly across the chest and as lowas possible over the pelvis, never across thestomach and must be worn properly at alltimes during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 14.

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe seat belt can be adapted using the fol-lowing equipment:

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stom-ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight ifnecessary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible overthe pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”the stomach››› Fig. 14.● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-ly, don't pull it away from your body withyour hand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of the

20

Seat belts

belt webbing, contact a specialised work-shop for help with any special devices toensure the optimum protection of the seatbelt and airbag. SEAT recommends takingyour car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the occupants in the frontseats are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions. This retracts and tightensthe seat belts, reducing the forward motion ofthe occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. In case of overturn,the pre-tensioners do not activate unless thehead airbags are deployed.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seatbelt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

21

Safety

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear aseat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, itis most important to properly wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 16, The whys andwherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

thrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orhead-protection airbags will not be triggered.Take into account that the visible damage ina vehicle involved in an accident, no matterhow serious, is not a determining factor forthe airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 16.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination with theseat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Knee airbag for the driver● Side airbags● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 24● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

22

Airbag system

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 24,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 13.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwisethere is a danger that during a collision, the

system may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication of firein the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

23

Safety

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag deactivated.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated.The control lamp turns off automatically 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind you thatthe airbag is deactivated. If, with the frontpassenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit along with thecontrol lamp on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . Ifthe control lamp is flashing, there is a fault inthe disabling of the airbag system ››› . Havethe system checked immediately by a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 15 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in thesteering wheel and that of the front passen-ger, on the instrument panel . Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

24

Airbag system

The airbag covers fold open and remain at-tached to the steering wheel ››› Fig. 15 andthe instrument panel ››› Fig. 16when the driv-er and front passenger airbags, respectively,are triggered.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

Activate and deactivate front pas-senger front airbag*

Fig. 17 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 18 On the roof console: control lamp forthe deactivation of the front passenger frontairbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you havedifficulty, ensure that you have inserted thekey as far as it will go.● Close the glove compartment.● When deactivating the airbag, switch theignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the roof console ››› Fig. 18.● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turnsoff. »

25

Safety

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

Knee airbag*

Fig. 19 On the driver side: location of the kneeairbag

Fig. 20 On the driver side: airbag action radiusfor the knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 19. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 20 is covered by the knee airbagwhen it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

WARNING● The knee airbag is deployed in front ofthe driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-ment areas of the knee airbags free.● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-tween your knees and the location of thethis airbag. If your physical constitutionprevents you from meeting these require-

ments, make sure you contact a special-ised workshop.

Side airbags*

Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbags on the left side of the vehicle.

26

Airbag system

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 21.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal protection, the seat belts also holdthe passengers in the event of a side collision;this is how these airbags provide maximumprotection.

WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system istriggered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escaping

through the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also importantnot to attach any accessories (such as cupholders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-

proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.

27

Safety

Head-protection airbags

Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR-BAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro-tection airbag is triggered on the impact sideof the vehicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the head-protectionairbag must be disabled in those vehiclesfitted with a screen dividing the interior ofthe vehicle. See your technical service tomake this adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.

● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and head-protection air-bags neither the doors nor the door panelsshould be modified in any way (e.g. fittingloudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the front doormust be done in a specialised workshop.

28

Transporting children safely

Transporting childrensafely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all ages(not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (RO-MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE /PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS+ TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX(ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATAMAXI).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 30.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 24 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg »29

Safety

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements of

universal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sunvisor

Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system.

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fitted tothe rear seat behind the front passenger seatso that the child can exit the vehicle on thepavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.

30


● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front facingrestraint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.● For a correct assembly of the child's seaton the rear seats, adjust or dismount theheadrest, in order to prevent contact with theseat.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to thecar is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in thehighest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas-senger front airbagA sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-er's sun visor and/or on the passenger sidedoor frame ››› Fig. 25.

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 22.● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 25.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 25.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 29.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactiva-ted ››› page 25. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while »

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

31

Safety

travelling. In an accident, the child couldbe flung through the vehicle, causing possi-bly fatal injuries to themselves and to theother vehicle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● When a child seat is mounted on the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated .

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-

tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 33. If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplemented witha Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 37.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 35. The ringsfor retaining the Top Tether belt are markedwith an anchor symbol.

● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seatfrom tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

32


Fixing a child seat with the ISOFIX/i-Size and Top Tether system

Fig. 27 Rear seat: cut-out grooves to accessthe ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings.

Fig. 28 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX/i-Sizesecuring rings.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear side and passengerseats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether sys-tem.

Two “ISOFIX” securing rings are fitted on eachrear side and passenger seat. In some vehi-

cles, the rings are secured to the seat frameand, in others, they are secured to the rearfloor. The “ISOFIX” rings are located betweenthe rear seat backrest and the seat cushion-ing ››› Fig. 27, ››› Fig. 28. The Top Tether ringsare located on the rear part of the rear seat

backrests (behind the backrest or in the lug-gage compartment) ››› page 35.

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the tablebelow. »

33

Safety

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X IL IL X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X IL IL X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer'svehicle list into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the classaccording to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

34


Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

X i-U i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” systemYou are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Open the cut-out section behind themarked grooves to access the retaining rings››› Fig. 27.● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings until it is heard to engage se-curely. If the child seat is equipped with TopTether anchor points, secure it to the corre-spondent ring ››› page 35. Observe themanufacturer's instructions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” and TopTether attachment system are available fromTechnical Services.

WARNINGThe securing rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether system,or safety belts or any other objects to thesecuring rings – as this can result in poten-tially fatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is correctly se-cured to the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether secur-ing rings.

Top Tether securing belts

Fig. 29 Rear seats: adjustment and assemblyaccording to the Top Tether belt. »

35

Safety

Fig. 30 Front passenger seat: adjustment andassembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-

cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Position the belt under the headrest (de-pending on the instructions of the seat itself,

lift or remove the headrest if necessary)››› Fig. 29 /, ››› Fig. 30 /.● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29 ,››› Fig. 30 .● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

36


Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: installing the childseat.

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your vehi-cle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group. »

37

Safety

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.

● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 30.

38

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Information, assistance andemergency call service*

How it works

Fig. 32 On the roof console: voice service con-trols

Depending on the equipment, there is a con-trol on the roof console.

By pressing the buttons , and ››› Fig. 32, you can run the following voiceservices:

● information call● assistance call● emergency call service.

A built-in control unit establishes the connec-tion.

When a voice service is activated, a connec-tion is established with a phone line.

Control lampThe control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 32(arrow). It shows the following statuses:

● Off: the eCall service is not available.● Flashes in red, approx. 20 seconds afterswing on the ignition: the eCall service isdeactivated.● Lights up red: system failure. The eCallservice is available with certain restrictions.SEAT suggests going to a specialised work-shop.● Lights up green: the eCall service is avail-able. The system works correctly.● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voiceconnection.

Information call1)

With the information call, a call is made toSEAT, S.A. customer service.

Breakdown call1)

With the assistance call you can directly re-quest specialised help in the event of abreakdown.

Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data istransmitted, e.g. your current location.

Emergency call service1)

If an emergency call is conducted manuallyor activated automatically in the event of anaccident with an airbag triggering, informa-tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast,e.g. the current location of the vehicle››› page 328.

If the call is public, the person on the otherend of the line uses the language of thecountry in which you are located.

If the call is private, the person on the otherend of the line will assist you in the languageyou have configured in the Infotainment sys-tem. If the configured language is not availa-ble, English will be used.

Diversion to 112 emergency numberIn some situations where the emergency callservice is limited or cannot be carried out, anemergency call is made to 112. »

1) Only available in certain countries.39

Emergencies

The following conditions may cause theemergency call service to function in a limi-ted manner or the call to be diverted to the112 emergency number:

● The emergency call is made from an areawith weak or no mobile and GPS signal, aswell as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build-ings, garages, underground walkways, moun-tains and valleys.● In areas with sufficient mobile telephoneand GPS coverage, the mobile telephonenetwork of the telecommunications operatorin question may not be available.● In some countries, the emergency call serv-ice may not be available due to legal rea-sons. There is no valid license for the use ofthe emergency call service.● The components of the vehicle required forthe emergency phone call are damaged ordo not get enough power.● In some countries, the emergency call serv-ice may not be available and depending onthe location of the vehicle, the control lampLEDs, and even the operation of the differenttypes of calls, could have a specific behav-iour.

NoteBreakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 33 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment. To ac-cess the vehicle tools ››› page 129.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*Towing eye, removableWheel spanner*Crank handle for jackJack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNINGWhen the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility setand spare wheel are loose in the interiorthey can be violently thrown in case of asudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-cially in accidents, causing serious injury.● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyremobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-rary spare wheel are safely secured in theluggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

40

Self-help

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake and put it in gear when using a man-

ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofinvoluntary movement of the vehicle.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteA new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

41

Emergencies

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 34 Standard representation: anti-punc-ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 34:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressor (depending on the ver-sion, the model may vary).ON/OFF switch

1

2

3

4

5

Air bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for a valve insert. The valve in-sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 34 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 34 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 34 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

6

7

8

9

10

11

● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre.● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 34 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 34 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 34 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 34 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 143.● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 34 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop

42

Self-help

and request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 34 2 to the in-strument cluster, within the driver's visualfield.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 43.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid

overheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.● Automatic transmission: Move the selectorlever to position P.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 40 andthe spare wheel* ready ››› page 315.● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

43

Emergencies

Integral wheel trim

Fig. 35 Remove the wheel cover.

The wheel covers must be removed for ac-cess to the wheel nuts.

Removing● Take the wheel brace and the wire hookfrom the vehicle tool kit ››› page 40.● Hook the wire through one of the grooves ofthe trim.● Insert the box spanner through the hook,rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim››› Fig. 35.

Fitting● Press the trim against the wheel so that thehole for the valve fits over the tyre valve.● Make sure that the trim is correctly fitted allthe way around the wheel. If you are using an

anti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the oppositeposition to the valve.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 36 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 33)over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 36.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelnuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 37 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 37 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 40) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 45.

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from theSEAT Official Service, indicating the codenumber.

44

Self-help

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 38 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 39 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and thecorrect position for the anti-theft wheel lockingbolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 38.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› .

Important information about wheel nutsFactory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel nuts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not evenuse wheel nuts from vehicles of the samemodel.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theftlocking bolt must be threaded onto positions››› Fig. 39 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not bepossible to mount the hubcap.

WARNINGIf the wheel nuts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel nuts which correspond tothe rim in question.● Never use different wheel nuts.● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● The wheel nuts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts orto the wheel hub threads. Even if the boltshave been tightened to the prescribed tor-que, they could come loose while driving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel nuts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel nuts or threadscan be damaged.

45

Emergencies

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 40 Jack position points.

Fig. 41 Cross member: positioning the jack onthe vehicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .

● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 40.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 41 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and the mo-bile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel isslightly lifted off the ground.

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack* is only de-signed for changing wheels on this model.On no account attempt to use it for liftingheavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-jury.● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other SEAT mod-els could slip, with the consequent risk ofinjury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on thepoints designed for this purpose on thestrut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelnuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim mayhit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-son, please take care and get a second per-son to assist you.

46

Self-help

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 47.

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Screw on the wheel nuts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nutsuse the corresponding adaptor.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on››› page 44.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nutsThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-

que checked immediately with a torquewrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have anyrusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread. Always observethe indicated direction of rotation in order toguarantee optimum grip and help avoidaquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite directionof rotation, drive with extreme caution, as thetyre is no longer being used correctly. This isof particular importance when the road sur-face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-sible or remount it with the correct directionof rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 128.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory››› page 314.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench ››› page 47. Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

47

Emergencies

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 42 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 42.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 292.● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 119 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

Changing the wiper rear wiperblades

Fig. 43 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise ofthe water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availa-ble from qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 48.● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade'sfastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.

48

Self-help

● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 43 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade● Separate the wiper arm from the rear win-dow.● Remove the blade from the holder belowthe centre. During this operation, hold thewiper arm firmly.● Fit the new blade (of the same length andtype) into the housing of the wipe arm bypressing it in place. When doing so, hold thewiper arm by the upper end.● Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the win-dow.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 48.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

49

Emergencies

Jump start: description

Fig. 44 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start-Stop system.

Fig. 45 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

1.

Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 44.Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .In vehicles without a Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 44.In vehicles with a Start-stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadX to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, orto the engine block itself ››› Fig. 45.Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 292.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery

8.

9.

10.

11.

50

Self-help

(12V) and approximately the same capaci-ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, batteryacid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 49.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheelcould lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed.● During towing, never switch off the igni-tion using the start button. Otherwise, theelectronic lock of the steering columncould suddenly become blocked and itwould be impossible to steer the vehicle.This could cause an accident, serious injuryand loss of control of the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:– You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering doesnot operate when the engine is switch-ed off. »

51

Emergencies

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.– Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used in-stead ››› page 49.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.

● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gear-boxes):● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights of both vehicles.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

CAUTION● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel couldenter the catalytic converter and damageit.● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 min attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-age to the catalytic converter.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started to de-

activate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be oper-ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, thehazard warning lights will go off. When theturn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering isnot blocked, and the electronic parking brakemay be deactivated and the turn signals andwash/wipe operated.

52

Self-help

● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Atow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-vice, towing with a tow bar is only permittedif it has been specially designed to be instal-led on a tow hitch ››› page 275.

When the vehicle has to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 53, Cases where towing the vehi-cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad.

● Switch the ignition on.● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in the N ››› page 206 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles).● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-mitted● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steeringoperation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:● Observe legal requirements.● Keep in mind the instructions in the manualon towing vehicles.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer.

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column are »

53

Emergencies

deactivated. If the vehicle has no powersupply or there is an electric system fault,the engine must be tow-started ››› page 49to deactivate the electronic parking brakeand the electronic lock of the steering col-umn.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 46 On the right side of the front bumper:remove the cover.

Fig. 47 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the front bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 46.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 52.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 40.● Remove the cover by pressing down on itsbase and leave it hanging from the vehicle››› Fig. 46.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 47 ››› . Use a suitable object

that can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and tighten on its rightside until the tab snaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

54

Self-help

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 48 On the right side of the rear bumper:remove the cover.

Fig. 49 On the right side of the rear bumper:towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 48.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towingbracket do not have any housing for the

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-led and used for towing ››› page 275, ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 52.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-out a factory-equipped towing bracket)● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 40.● Press the bottom side of the lid ››› Fig. 48 tounclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 49 ››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION● The towing eye must always be com-pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, itcould be released while towing and tow-starting.

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to towwith a tow bar if this has been specially de-signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If anunsuitable tow bar is used, both the towhitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-stead, a tow rope should be used.

55

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec-trical system, before replacing a fuse al-ways turn off the ignition, the lights and allelectrical elements.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 50 On the driver's side dashboard: fusebox cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box locatedbelow the instrument panel● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 50.● Close: push back the cover it in until it clicksinto place.

Identifying fuses below below the dash-board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

56

Fuses and bulbs

Colour Amp rating

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 51 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 292.● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 51.● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 52 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 56, ››› page 57.

Recognise a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 52.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Fuse placement

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

3 Trailer 25

4 SCR, Adblue 20

5 Automatic gearbox lever 25

6 Interior light 30

8 Sunroof 20

7 Heated seats 20

9 Left door 30

11 Trailer 15 »57

Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps

12 Right lights 40

13 Central locking 40

14 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

16 Airbag 7.5

17 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

18 KESSY 10

19 Instrument panel 7.5

20 Connectivity Box 7.5

21 Rear camera 7.5

24 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

26 Right door 30

29 Trailer 15

30 Radio 20

31 Trailer 25

35 Left lights 40

36 Air conditioner fan 40

37 Electric rear lid 30

39 Heated steering wheel 10

40 Alarm horn 7.5

41 Gateway 7.5

42 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

43Air conditioning and heating con-trol panel, rear window heating, AAcompressor

10

44Diagnosis, handbrake switch, lightswitch, reverse light, interior light-ing, lit-up door sill

7.5

45 Steering column 7.5

46 Radio display 7.5

47 Driving mode. 15

48 USB 7.5

52 12V socket 20

58 Parking sensors, parking assistcontrol unit, front camera, radar 7.5

59 Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec-trochromic mirror 7.5

60 Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster 7.5

61 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

64 Airbag 7.5

65 Sound amplifier 10

66 Rear window wiper 15

67 Heated rear window 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

2 Engine control unit 7.5

3 Fuel pump control unit 7.5

7 Automatic gearbox pump 30

9 Horn 15

10 Front windscreen washer 30

12 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

13 ESP control unit 25

15 ESP control unit 40/60

17 PTC 40

18 PTC 40

20 Front electronic differential 15

21 Engine control unit 5

22 Starter motor 30

23 Engine control unit (diesel/petrol) 30/15

24 Engine sensors 7.5/10

25 Engine sensors 7.5/10

26 Engine power supply 7.5/10

27 Lambda probe 10/15

28 Engine 10/20

29 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

58

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

30 Pressure pump 1.0 15

31 Brake light sensor 7.5

33 PTC 40

36 Right LED headlight 15

37 Left LED headlight 15

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Bulbs

Changing bulbs

Full-LED headlightsFull-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam

and route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go to anauthorised workshop to have it replaced.

Fog lights*, rear lights, license plate light,side turn signals and additional brake lightTaking into account that they use LED bulbs,they should be replaced at a technical serv-ice centre.

59

Operation

Fig. 53 Instruments and controls.

60

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handleAir vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Control lever for:– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 219Switches for:– Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 79– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and voice control sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-

shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 209Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Control lever for:– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 119– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 25Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116USB type-C ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Depending on the equipment:– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 254Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Adjustable steering column. . . . . . . . . . 15Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Control for lighting and demistingwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Control for the electric adjustmentof the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras.

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 60. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

61

Operation

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrumentpanel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEATCockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructions

on the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the Info-tainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

62

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 54 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 54:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-nute) ››› page 74.Engine coolant temperature indicator››› page 75.Displays on the screen ››› page 65.Speedometer.Fuel gauge ››› page 75.

1

2

3

4

5

63

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 55 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrumentpanel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:Control and warning lamps››› page 80Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 74.Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 65SpeedometerDigital speed displayInformation Profile ››› page 64.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrumentpanel digital with monochrome screen in col-our high resolution. It has a 4 views accessi-ble using the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel. By selecting different infor-mation profiles, indications other than theclassic circular instruments can be displayed,such as navigation data, multimedia informa-tion or travel data.

The 4 views are:● Classic● Assistance systems● Navigation*

● Night

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

Information profilesUsing the buttons / on the multifunctionsteering wheel you can navigate through thedifferent information of the SEAT DigitalCockpit.

Information on the vehicle status, travel dataand assistants will be displayed on the leftside.

1) Depending on the version.64


On the right side information will be dis-played on audio, telephone, compass* andnavigation* manoeuvres.

Depending on the view in the central area ofthe SEAT Digital Cockpit , information will bedisplayed on:

● Classic View: Initial data, date, distancetravelled and autonomy. Turn the rightthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel: navigation map*, traffic signs*, traveldata (by clicking on , it changes betweenthe different memories).● Assists View: This is accessed by pressingthe button or the button on the multi-function steering wheel. By turning the rightthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel the different aids are displayed, press to select the desired aid.● Navigation View: By pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel and thenturning the thumbwheel you can view themap in a larger or smaller view. If you pressedthe button again, the map returns to auto-matic scale.● Night View: The speed is displayed in digitalformat.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedometerneedles appear in full length by a long presson the button on the multifunction steer-

ing wheel, regardless of the menu displayedin the central area ››› Fig. 55.

With another long press on the button ,the display will returns to the previous view.

Or looking in the instrument panel menu forthe Close option using the right handthumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel, and then press .

Information that may appear in the centralarea of the SEAT Digital Cockpit speed-ometer● Audio● Telephone● Compass*● Navigation indications* (the most recentdestinations are displayed by pressing the ar-row on the right of the multifunction steeringwheel)● > (close classic view).

Information that may appear in the centralarea of the SEAT Digital Cockpit revolutioncounter● Consumption and average consumption.By pressing the arrow on the left of the multi-function steering wheel, you can switch be-tween the different memories of the traveldata.● Autonomy (fuel tank level).

● Lubricating oil and coolant temperature● Average speed. By pressing the arrow onthe left of the multifunction steering wheel,you can switch between the different memo-ries of the travel data.● AdBlue autonomy.● Other travel data: km travelled and drivingtime. By pressing the arrow on the left of themultifunction steering wheel, you can switchbetween the different memories of the traveldata.● Assist systems.● > (close classic view).

Status display

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument panel,depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 74● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature »

65

Operation

● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear-change recommendation››› page 213● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 67● Service interval display ››› page 76● Speed warning ››› page 68● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 203● Signals detected by the traffic signal de-tection system and warning that the maxi-mum allowed speed* has been exceeded››› page 71● Indication of active cylinder managementstatus (ACT®) ››› page 217● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 219● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display may

vary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutchshift)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, insome cases, the gear engaged in each caseis shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicatorIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-iliary heater is switched on or when driving atvery low speeds, the outside temperature in-dicated may be higher than the actual tem-perature due to the heat produced by the en-gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Gear-change recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of certainvehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-tion for saving fuel ››› page 213.

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

To reset the trip odometer (trip ) to 0:

● When in in Travel data select trip.● Hold the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel down for about 2 sec-onds.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum speed set is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 67.

The speed warning can be adjusted in the In-fotainment system, by using the function but-ton > Exterior > Tyres ››› page 87.

Indications of the compassDepending on the equipment, when the igni-tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-cates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and thereis no route guidance active, the graphic rep-resentation of a compass is also shown.

66


Low consumption driving *Depending on the equipment, when driving,the display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consumptionstatus due to active cylinder management(ACT®)* ››› page 217.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Switch the ignition on, but do not start theengine.● See Service menu ››› page 67.

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature is high-er than freezing temperature, some roadsand bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panels andtherefore the versions and instructions onthe display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument panelscreen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Instrument panel menus3 Applies to vehicles with analogue instrumentpanel

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 68■ Assistance systems.■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 239■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 223■ ACC (only display) ››› page 229

■ Navigation.■ Audio.■ Telephone.■ Vehicle status ››› page 69

Service Menu

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuVehicles with analogue instrument panel:● To open up the Service menu, select theRange information profile while in the Driv-ing data menu, and keep the key pressed »

67

Operation

on the multifunction steering wheel for ap-proximately 5 seconds. When it is released,the Service menu will be displayed. Nowyou can browse through the menu using thekeys on the multifunction steering wheel asusual.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel (SEATDigital Cockpit):● While in Classic View, go to the Initial Da-ta screen, press the button on the multi-function steering wheel for about 5 secondsand release it.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrument pan-el display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc-tion display)

3 Applies to vehicles with analogue instrumentpanel

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to anotherVehicles without multifunction steering wheel:● press the rocker switch on the wind-screen wiper lever ››› page 78.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› page 79.

Changing memoryVehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Depending on the view, select Trip dataand press the left arrow or the button onthe multifunction steering wheel.

Since start: The memory is deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than 2hours.Since refuelling: Display and stor-age of the journey data and the con-sumption values collected. When refuel-ling, the memory is deleted.Long-term: This memory contains trav-el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or9999.9 km. When one of these values isexceeded (varies depending on the ver-sion of the instrument panel), the memo-ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● When in Travel data select desired memo-ry.● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the

–

–

–

68


multifunction wheel pressed down for about 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-cle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 87.

Current consumption: The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100 km;and with the engine running and the ve-hicle stopped, in litres/hour.Average consumption: The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.Travelling time: This indicates thehours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig-nition was switched on.Range: Approximate distance in km thatcan still be travelled if the same drivingstyle is maintained.Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy : Ap-proximate distance in km that can still betravelled with the current level of theAdBlue® tank with the same driving style.The indication appears from a range of

–

–

–

–

–

less than 2,400 km and cannot be de-activated.1)

Distance: Distance covered in km (m)after switching on the ignition.Average speed: The average speedwill be shown after driving for approxi-mately 100 metres.Digital speed: Current speed dis-played in digital format.Eco tips: Recommendations messag-es are shown to reduce consumptionthrough good driving practices, e.g. Airconditioning on: close the win-dow.

Oil and coolant temperature indication(only with digital instrument panel)The engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C and120ºC. If the engine is under a lot of stressand the outside temperature is high, the en-gine oil temperature can increase. This doesnot present any problem as long as the warn-ing lamps or ››› page 296 do not ap-pear on the display.

–

–

–

–

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults are displayed on the instrument paneldisplay as red and yellow warning symbols2)

accompanied by messages and, dependingon the case, even an audible warning››› page 80. The representation of the mes-sages and symbols may vary depending onthe version of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle info››› page 86.

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids can »

1) Not available in all countries.2) With an analogue instrument panel, the warn-ings are always shown in white.

69

Operation

cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possible.If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes in thevehicle.

Accessing warnings and information● Using the Infotainment system, press > Vehicle info > Vehicle status > Warnings.

● Or:1) Access the Vehicle menu, then pressthe button on the multifunction steeringwheel or the button on the wind-screen wiper lever and select Warning mes-sage memories.

Driver alert system (break recom-mendation)*

Fig. 56 On the instrument panel display: driveralert system symbol.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-stantly compared with the current driving be-haviour. If the system detects that the driver istired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 56. The mes-sage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steering wheel››› page 78.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 68.

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offFatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the infotainment system using thefunction button > Driver assistance > Fa-tigue detector ››› page 87. A mark indi-cates that the adjustment has been activa-ted.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

1) Vehicles with analogue instrument panel.70


● When cornering● On roads in poor condition● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-tem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.● Never drive if you are tired.

● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 70,System limitations.● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developedfor driving on motorways and well pavedroads only.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 57 On the instrument panel display: ex-amples of recognised signals.

The traffic signal detection system is activa-ted whenever the vehicle ignition is switchedon.

The system records the standard traffic signsin front of the vehicle with a camera locatedon the base of the interior mirror and providesinformation about speed limits, hazard warn-ings and overtaking prohibitions. Within itslimitations, the system also displays addition-al signals, such as time-specific prohibitions,signs for vehicles towing trailers ››› page 275or limitations that only apply in the event ofrain. Even on journeys without signs, the sys-tem may display any applicable speed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad. »

1) System available depending on the country.71

Operation

Shown on the displayIn Germany, on motorways and vehicleroads, besides speed limits and overtakingprovisions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 57 and, depending on the navigationsystem fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 83.

Hazard warning signs are not displayed in theinfotainment system.

Road sign detection system messages:There are no traffic signs available● The system is in its start-up phase.● OR: the camera has not recognized anymandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable● The speed warning function of the roadsign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: pleaseclean the windscreen.● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currentlyrestricted.● The navigation system is not transmittingdata. Check if the navigation system has up-dated maps.● OR: the vehicle is in a region not includedon the navigation system's map.

No data available● The traffic sign detection system does notwork in the current country.

Display of traffic signsWhen the traffic sign detection system is con-nected, a camera located on the base of theinterior rear-view mirror records the trafficsigns in front of the vehicle. After checkingand evaluating the information from the cam-era, the navigation system and the currentvehicle data, up to two valid road signs aredisplayed, with their corresponding addition-al signs:

● First position. The sign that is currently val-id for the driver is shown in the screen. For ex-ample, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h(100 mph) ››› Fig. 57.

● Second position. A second traffic sign maybe displayed in the second position, such asa hazard warning sign, an overtaking prohibi-tion or an alternative speed limit.

Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signal withthe additional rain sign will be shown first, onthe left, as it is the one that is applicable atthe time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. no over-taking at certain times, may be displayed.

Speed warning (depending on the instru-ment panel)If the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a message onthe dash panel display.

Trailer modeIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it ispossible to activate or deactivate the displayof specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions. Activation or deactivation is carried outin the infotainment system using the functionbutton > Driver assistance > Trailer as-sist ››› page 87.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legal

72


provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speedgreater than that which is permitted in thecountry in question for driving with a trailer,the system automatically displays the usualspeed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limits asif there were no trailer hitched.

No entry signThe traffic sign recognition system warnsacoustically and visually in the instrumentpanel when a no entry sign is crossed on aone-way road or an entrance to a motorwayor highway.

Limited operationThe traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.● When driving at high speeds.● If the camera is covered or dirty.

● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-cles.● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations.● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns.● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variabletraffic signs or other lighting units).● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

WARNINGThe technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposedby the laws of physics and only works with-in the system's limits. Do not let the extraconvenience afforded by the traffic signdetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain andfog may lead to the system failing to dis-

play traffic signs or not displaying themcorrectly.● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation maybe impaired.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the traffic sign detec-tion system may differ from the actual cur-rent traffic situation.● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

WARNINGIf messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● Never ignore the messages displayed.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

NoteTo avoid affecting the correct operation ofthe system, take the following points intoconsideration: »

73

Operation

● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the cam-era's field of vision.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.● Failure to heed the control lamps andcorresponding text messages when theylight up may result in damage to the vehi-cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press / > Settings.● Select the menu option Time and date toset the time ››› page 83.

Setting the time on an analogue instru-ment panel● In the classic view ››› page 65 hold the but-ton of the multifunction steering wheelpressed when you have selected the date,route and autonomy information.● Press and turn the button to make theadjustments.

Setting the time on analogue the instru-ment panel● When in the Trip data menu select theAutonomy function ( > Interior > Instru-ment panel).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 67.● Select the menu Time.● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the engine hot.However, it is advisable to change up a gearor move the selector lever to D (or lift yourfoot off the accelerator) before the needlereaches the red zone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 213, Selecting theoptimal gear.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

74


Fuel gauge

Fig. 58 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 59 Digital instrument panel: fuel level in-dicator located in different positions depend-ing on the view.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have theopportunity.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in diesel.Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 334 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly orswitches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicleto stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust

system. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

Engine coolant temperature indica-tor.

Fig. 60 Analogue instrument panel: enginecoolant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid highspeeds and stressing the engine if it hasnot reached operating temperature.Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine work »

A

B

75

Operation

hard, the diodes may continue lighting upand reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

In vehicles with digital instrument panel (SEATDigital Cockpit) you can select to view thecoolant temperature in the correspondingmenu ››› page 65.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 298.

C

● If the warning lamp does not switch off evenif the coolant level is correct, request assis-tance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 69 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehicleis moving. If the spoiler is damaged this canreduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display and the Infotain-ment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-

sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of useand individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) andthe time is given in complete days. The cur-rent service message cannot be viewed until500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

76


The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Please have your vehicle inspec-ted.● Oil change service due!● Oil change service and inspectiondue!

Consult a service notificationWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press / > Settings.● Select the Applications and servicesmenu option to display information about theservices.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Hold the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multi-func-tion steering wheel pressed down for about 5seconds to view the service message.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 67.

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● While in the Autonomy ››› page 69 menu,press the button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel for about 4 seconds and release it.The Services menu is accessed.● Select Reset Service or Reset OilService (depending on the version or whatyou want to do) and press the button onthe multifunction steering wheel.● The system will ask Do you want to re-set?. By pressing the button again, theService is reset.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 67.

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, theservice interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen button is pressed on the wiperlever, or the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mind themaximum service intervals permitted››› page 317.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by a SEAT author-ised Dealer.

77

Operation

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the wiper lever

Fig. 61 Wiper lever: control keys.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 69 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 61 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.● To display the menus ››› page 67 or to re-turn to the selection of menus from a menu orfrom an informative display, hold down therocker button 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.● To open the menu or the informative displayshown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds

until the menu or the informative displayopens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press button 1 to make the required modi-fications. A mark indicates that the system orfunction is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

78


Operation using the multifunctionsteering wheel

Fig. 62 Right side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and informationdisplays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 69 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 62.

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 62; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 62.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 62 or wait

a few seconds until the menu or the informa-tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel››› Fig. 62 until the desired option of the menuis highlighted. The option appears framed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 62 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or .

Button for the driver assistancesystems*

Fig. 63 On the turn signal and main beam lev-er: button for driver assistance systems (de-pending on versions). »

79

Operation

Fig. 64 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: button for driver assistance systems(depending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam headlightlever button, you can activate or deactivatethe driver assistance systems displayed in theAssistance systems menu .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the turn signal leverand main beam headlight● Press ››› Fig. 63 1 or 2 briefly to open theDriving aids menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 78. A mark in-dicates that driver assistance system isswitched on.● Afterwards, mark or confirm the selectionwith button on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the multifunctionsteering wheel*● Press the button ››› Fig. 64 to open theAids menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates thatdriver assistance system is switched on.● Next, confirm the selection by pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The driver assistance systems can also beswitched on and off in the infotainment sys-tem, in the menu Vehicle settings››› page 87.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switchoff when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 62, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 252.

Fault in the brake system ››› page 252.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 214.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 16.

Press the foot brake ››› page 230.

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCRsystem ››› page 288.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 252.

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ESC or TCS in operation››› page 257.

80


TCS manually deactivated; OR ESC inSport mode ››› page 257.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 257.

Electronic parking brake faulty.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 110.

Fault in the emission control system››› page 290.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR faultin the management of the diesel engine››› page 290.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 290.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 290.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 214.

Tyre pressure monitor system››› page 314.

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 75.

Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-tem ››› page 288.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-sioners ››› page 24.

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 24.

The front passenger front airbag is activa-ted ››› page 24.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 240.

Error in the lane assist warning system››› page 240.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 110.

Low engine oil level ››› page 296.

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 212.

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low››› page 119.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 110.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 110.

Press the foot brake ››› page 207.

Auto Hold active (lights green), or AutoHold paused (lights white) ››› page 255.

Speed regulator ››› page 219; OR Adap-tive Cruise Control (ACC) ››› page 230.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 240.

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 110.

Auxiliary heating*

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 66.

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 75.

Engine oil pressure ››› page 296.

Fault in the battery ››› page 304.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)››› page 110.

Service interval display ››› page 76.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-tooth®.

Mobile telephone battery charge status.

Risk of freezing ››› page 66.

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 203.

Start-Stop system unavailable››› page 203.

Low consumption driving status››› page 67.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-ous injuries may occur.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users. »

81

Operation

If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 292.

82


Infotainment System

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im-portant vehicle functions and systems into asingle central control unit, e.g. air condition-ing, menu settings, radio equipment and thenavigation system.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

General operating informationGeneral information on the operation of theinfotainment system, as well as on the warn-ing and safety instructions that must be takeninto account, is found in ››› page 153.

How to move through the different menusand select them● Switch the ignition on.● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.● The different menus are selected directlyon the touch screen using texts, icons or but-tons.

If the box is checked , the function is activa-ted.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

Scroll bar: Some menus and functions showmore content above or below those dis-played on the screen at that time, for exam-

ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scrollbar and pull up or down.

TutorialThe first time you connect the Infotainmentsystem, a system tutorial will open with a briefdescription of the main functions and how touse it.

HelpIn the Help menu you will find more informa-tion and tips for using the Infotainment Sys-tem.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the Info-tainment system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

83

Operation

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 65 Schematic representation: Overview of thepossible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screenThe following information is always visible,even with the Infotainment system turned off››› Fig. 65:

Time or Incoming call.Air conditioning menu ››› page 146.Status bar. System customisation basedon user and notifications.

A

B

C

Bottom part of the screenMain menu display mode:: main menu with the 6 main functionsdivided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa-ble by the user by pressing on the func-tion).: main menu in mosaic mode (all func-tions of the Infotainment System)

D

Direct accesses to the functions of the In-fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 +5, customisable by the user). By pressingon the icon, you can select/deselect thefunctions in question.Direct access to the assist systems andvehicle settings ››› page 87.

E

F

84


Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 66 Schematic representation: Initial configu-ration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help youto set up your Infotainment system the firsttime you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will appear››› Fig. 66 if any parameters have not beenset (marked with “”) or if the Don't showagain function button has not been pressed.

Function button: Function

Closes the Configuration Wizard.

A Press to set day and time.


BPress to search and store to memorythe radio stations that have the bestreception at that moment.

C Press to go to the Online Media set-tings.

D Press to link your mobile telephoneto the Infotainment system.

EPress to select your home addressusing your current position or bymanually entering an address.


Don't showagain

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. If you wish to perform the initialconfiguration, you must accessthrough Help.

Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

Previous /Next

EndOnce one or more settings havebeen applied, press to finalise thesetup in the main menu of the wizard.

85

Operation

Vehicle information

Fig. 67 Schematic representation: Vehicle infor-mation and status

Clicking on Vehicle info from the mainmenu opens the Vehicle info menu with thefollowing submenus:

Driving data. The average consump-tion, average speed, distance travelled,trip duration and autonomy are shown. Ithas 3 memories: “From departure”, “To-tal calculation” and “From refuelling”››› page 68.Vehicle status. The warnings regardingfaults, incidents, memorisation of thetyre pressure or information of the nextinspection service are displayed.

–

–

86


Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 68 Schematic representation: Assist systemsand vehicle settings

By clicking on ››› Fig. 68 A , or in the mainmenu on the Vehicle settings symbol, theassist services menu and vehicle settings willopen.

Then, by clicking on any of the menus loca-ted in the left area B , the selected settings orassist systems menu are displayed.

The number of assist systems and settingsdepend on the version and the country inquestion.

The C points indicate that, by moving yourfinger over the screen, from left to right orvice versa, the rest of the assist services thatthe model is equipped with will be shown.■ Driver assistance

■ Automatic parking brake activation››› page 254.

■ Park assist ››› page 260.■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation

systems and brake assist ››› page 257.■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-

tem ››› page 203.■ Travel Assist (cruise control system,

speed limiter, adaptive speed control,etc.) ››› page 219.

■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system)››› page 239.

■ Emergency brake assistance system(Front Assist) ››› page 223.

■ Fatigue detection ››› page 70.■ Lane assist ››› page 245.

■ Emergency assist ››› page 243.■ SEAT Drive Profile ››› page 214■ Vehicle lights ››› page 118■ Interior settings■ Instrument panel ››› page 65.■ Lighting ››› page 117.■ Rear view mirrors ››› page 121.

■ Exterior settings■ Closing ››› page 89.■ Lights ››› page 110.■ Windows ››› page 106.■ Tyres ››› page 314.

87

Operation

Multifunction steeringwheel*

Functions

Fig. 69 Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 70 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunctionmodules from where it is possible to controlthe audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-

trol and assist functions without the driverneeding to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

Symbol Function

1 Turn: Turn volume up/downPress Mute volume

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panelmenu. In Navigation mode, turn to in-crease/decrease map size in SEATDigital CockpitPress: Select the highlighted option inthe instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/nextstation.Media: Short press: previous/nexttrack; long press: rapid fast for-ward/rewind

Activate phone menu (answer call,end call)

Switch between media and radiosources

Change the instrument panel menu(previous/next)

Enable/disable voice control

Analogue Panel: No functionDigital Panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit):Change digital panel views››› page 64

Activate or deactivate steering wheelheating ››› page 151

Symbol Function

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-trol system ››› page 219 / ACC››› page 229 / Speed limiter››› page 221

: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys-tem / Limiter: Reset programmed ACC speed orcruise control system

: Increase programmed speed: Decrease programmed speed

Open the drive assist menu in the in-strument panel

Modify the programmed ACC dis-tance

88

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 71 Vehicle key

Fig. 72 Vehicle key: remove the key blade.

Key to ››› Fig. 71Unlock the vehicle1

Lock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Button to remove the key blade.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 91.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicleusing the remote control key, this should bere-synchronised ››› page 91 or the batterychanged ››› page 90.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Remove the key blade from the remotecontrolThe central locking remote control has thekey blade inside it for use in case of emergen-cy locking/unlocking of the driver's door››› page 100.

If you press button ››› Fig. 71 4 once the keyblade is unlocked and a ring appears as a

2

3

4

key ring. Press and hold the button and at thesame time pull on the ring in the direction ofarrow ››› Fig. 72 2 to completely remove thekey blade.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 71 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down fora longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 90.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 91. »

89

Operation

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equip-ment (e.g. electric windows), causing riskof accident. The doors can be locked usingthe remote control key. This could becomean obstacle for assistance in an emergen-cy situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

also possible even when you are outsidethe radius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to thevehicle working in the same range of fre-quencies, for example, radio transmitters ormobile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 93 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brief-ly disconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are availableat your Technical Service, where they mustbe matched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

To change the battery

Fig. 73 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 89.● Remove the lid on the back of the vehiclekey ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 73.● Insert the new battery and press it in thebattery compartment in the opposite direc-tion to the arrow ››› Fig. 73.● Place the cover and press it into the vehiclekey housing until it clicks into place.

90

Opening and closing

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 89.● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.● If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. Ifthe driver door is open, the vehicle cannot belocked with the key.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked fora long period (e.g. in a private garage) mayrun down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individual fromopening the doors and accessing the vehi-cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency oraccident, locked doors will complicate ac-cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-sengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals lockedin the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 93.● From outside with the Keyless Access››› page 94 system,● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 93.

Various functions are available to improve thevehicle safety:

● Security system “Safe” ››› page 97● Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlocking● Selective unlocking system● Automatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system (Auto Lock)● Emergency unlocking system »

91

Operation

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use the Infotainment sys-tem setting ››› page 92.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle can be unlocked via the centrallocking switch or by pulling one of the doorhandles.

The Auto Lock function can be activated anddeactivated in the radio or in the Infotainmentsystem ››› page 92.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the central locking switch››› page 93.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEATOfficial Service or specialised workshop.

● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed inthe Infotainment system.

Unlocking doors● Press the function button > Exterior >Closing > Unlocking the doors.

You can choose to unlock all the doors or on-ly the driver door when you unlock the vehi-cle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is alsounlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, onlythe driver door is unlocked. If that button ispressed twice, the rest of the doors and therear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)● Press the function button > Exterior >Closing > Automatic locking.

92

Opening and closing

If the function is activated, all the vehicledoors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9mph).

You can unlock the doors by pressing thecentral locking button ››› page 93 or, in-dividually, by operating the inside door han-dle (e.g. so that a passenger can get out).

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 74 Remote control key: buttons.

● Lock: press the button››› Fig. 74.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the button.● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or the

rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply if youpress the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking systemThe selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:● Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in the open-ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously:● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn the keytwice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-tion.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theftalarm* deactivate immediately when onlythe driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Infotainment system, you canprogramme the security central locking sys-tem directly ››› page 92.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Lock-ing system “Safe” on page 98.

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 107, Convenience open/closefunction.

Unlocking and locking from the in-side

Fig. 75 In the centre console: central lockingswitch

● Lock: press the button››› Fig. 75.● Unlock: Press the button again ››› Fig. 75. »

93

Operation

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance inan emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-cially children, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 91. You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

Unlock and lock the vehicle withKeyless Access

Fig. 76 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 77 Door handle: sensor surfaces

››› Fig. 77Unlocking sensor surface on the inside ofthe door handle.Locking sensor surface on the outside ofthe door handle.

A

B

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Configure the Keyless Access systemThe behaviour of the Keyless Access systemcan be adjusted in the Vehicle settingsmenu of the Infotainment system.

If the Keyless Access function is disabled, itsoperation is limited.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. For this, it is onlynecessary that there is a valid vehicle key inthe detection area corresponding to the at-tempted access to the vehicle.

Unlock the vehicle● Touch the surface of the sensor located in-side the handle A. All turn signals will flashtwice.

If the sensor surface is touched twice, the en-tire vehicle will unlock.

Automatic vehicle unlockThe vehicle can be unlocked automatically.To do this, the function must be activated inthe Infotainment system and the vehicle keymust be in the proximity zone of the vehicle.

If the key is in the proximity zone, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked.

94

Opening and closing

If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extendedperiod, the function is deactivated.

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-essary adjustments can be performed in ve-hicles with a driver information system››› page 87.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car››› Fig. 76, the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon asone of the sensor surfaces on the front doorhandles is touched.

The following features are then availablewithout having to use the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.

● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 199.

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; locking bya single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside, thevehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors(Keyless-Entry)● Grip one of the front door handles. Whenyou do this, you touch the sensor surface››› Fig. 77 A (arrow) of the handle and thevehicle unlocks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) on one of the front doorhandles. The door that is used must beclosed.

In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 77B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security sys-tem ››› page 97. The door that is used mustbe closed.● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 77B (arrow) of one of the front door handles to

lock the vehicle without activating the“Safelock” security system ››› page 97. »

95

Operation

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity zone ››› Fig. 76.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a second ve-hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blockedfor engine ignition ››› page 199. In order toenable engine ignition, press the button onthe key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branchesof a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's KeylessAccess unlocking for one locking and unlock-ing cycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on the re-mote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 77 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.

The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Keyless Access permanent disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle unlock withKeyless Access permanently in the infotain-ment system so that others cannot unlock orstart the vehicle.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows and the sun-roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-ger for a few seconds on the locking sensorsurface ››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) of the door han-dle until the windows and roof have closed.

How the doors open when touching the sen-sor surface on the door handle will dependon the settings that have been activated inthe infotainment system, using the functionbutton > Exterior > Closing.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehiclekey in the proximity. If at least one of theelectric windows is open and the sensorsurface ››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) on one of thehandles is activated continuously, all win-dows will close.

96

Opening and closing

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehi-cle can be unlocked or locked manually››› page 100.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver and passenger door handles››› page 121.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic gearbox, it may only be locked in thegear stick is in position P.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote controldoes not detect movement for a certainlength of time, the system will concludethat the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. ona night table) so it will be disabled.● If, when trying to block the vehicle, thelast used key is still inside, all the turn sig-nals will flash 4 times.

Locking system “Safe”1)

When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se-curity system puts the door handles out ofoperation and prevents unauthorised personsfor entering. The doors cannot be openedfrom inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching theignition off, a warning may be displayed on

the control panel screen stating that the“Safe” security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.● On vehicles with the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system: touch the sensor surfaceon the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be unlocked and openedfrom the inside using an door handle.● The anti-theft alarm is activated.● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” statusThe flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence »

1) Available depending on market and version.97

Operation

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children)in the vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it. The systemwill initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.The system is immediately activated and theturn signal light located on the driver door willflash along with the turn signals, indicatingthat the alarm and the locking security sys-tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

quently closed, they will be automatically in-cluded in the protection areas of the vehicleand the turn signals will flash accordinglywhen the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds alongside a sound andoptical (flashing) warning signals and will berepeated about ten times when the vehicle islocked and the following unauthorised ac-tions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switchingon the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there isno 15 second waiting time and the alarm isactivated immediately on opening the door).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 99).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 99).● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 99).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 99).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key.● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanicallyusing the key, the ignition must be turned onwithin 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTIONIf the anti-theft security system is switchedoff, the vehicle interior monitoring and thetow-away protection are automaticallydisconnected.

98

Opening and closing

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within usingthe central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-ly with the key, only the driver door is un-locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.Only when the ignition has been turned onwill the other doors be available - but notunlocked - and the central locking buttonwill be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 97 isswitched off, the vehicle interior monitoringand the tow-away protection are automati-cally disconnected.

Activation● It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button on theremote control. The time period from whenthe door is opened until the ignition is turnedon should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwisethe alarm will be triggered.● Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensorswill be deactivated. The alarm system re-mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

Deactivation through the infotainmentsystem● Turn off the ignition and press the functionbutton > Exterior > Closing > Interiormonitoring.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away protec-tion are switched off until the next time thedoor is opened.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements. »

99

Operation

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging from therear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activated

once all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking ofthe driver’s door

Fig. 78 Driver door handle: locking cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructions

100

Opening and closing

relating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 98.

● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key››› page 89.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder tounlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 98.● After the driver door is opened, you have 15seconds to switch on the ignition. Once thistime has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-activates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using thekey shaft ››› page 91.

Emergency lock of doors withoutlock cylinders

Fig. 79 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front ofthe front passenger's door and the reardoors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it tothe right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Childproof locks

Fig. 80 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe left hand side doors ››› Fig. 80 and anti-clockwise for the right hand side doors. »

101

Operation

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 80 andclockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.

● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in agarage.

NoteBefore closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 81 Rear lid: opening from outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by using the insignia sha-ped handle on the rear lid ››› Fig. 81.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● To open: pull on the handle and lift it up››› Fig. 81. The rear lid opens automatically.● Close: hold the gate by one of the handlesfitted to the inner lining and close it by movingit downwards.

102

Opening and closing

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is alsolocked.

Rear lid with electric opening andclosing*

3 Valid for: Leon Sportstourer

Fig. 82 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.

Fig. 83 On the driver’s door: button to openand close the rear lid.

Opening the rear lid● Unlock the vehicle and briefly press thehandle of the rear lid. On vehicles withKeyless Access you can directly press thehandle of the rear lid. The rear lid is unlockedif an authorised key is recognised in the prox-imity of the vehicle.● OR: pull the button on the driver doorupwards ››› Fig. 83. The button also workswhen the ignition is switched off.● OR: press and hold the button of the ve-hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle islocked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doorsremain locked).● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access andsensor-controlled opening you can open therear lid by moving one foot in the area of thesensors located below the rear bumper (EasyOpen ››› page 104). The rear lid will openautomatically.

Closing the rear lid● Briefly press the button on the rearlid››› Fig. 82.● OR: pull the button on the driver doorupwards ››› Fig. 83.● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, pressand hold the vehicle key button until therear lid is closed, or move one foot into thearea of the sensors located below the rearbumper (Easy Open) ››› page 104. The key

of the vehicle must not be further away than1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle.● OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-tion of closing until it closes automatically.● The rear lid lowers automatically to the fi-nal position and also locks automatically .

Interrupting opening or closingAfter beginning to open or close the rear lid,the action can be halted by pressing one ofthe buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid byhand. To do this, some force will have to beused.

If you press one of the buttons again, therear lid will move again in the original direc-tion.

If the rear lid meets with resistance or an ob-stacle during the automatic opening or clos-ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im-mediately. For the closing process, the rearlid opens again slightly.

● Check why it has not been possible to openor close the rear lid.● Try to open or close the rear lid again.● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened orclosed by hand using reasonable force. »

103

Operation

Particular features if towing a trailerIf the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-cally connected to a trailer, the electric rearlid can only be opened or closed with thebuttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warningsThroughout the process of opening or closingthe rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-tion with the movement of the foot or closedusing the button on the rear lid itself››› Fig. 82.

Modifying and memorising the openingangleIf the space behind or above the vehicle isless than the travel area of the rear lid, youcan change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rearlid must be open at least halfway.

● Interrupt the opening process in the desiredposition.● Press the button ››› Fig. 82 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-tion is indicated by blinking of the hazardwarning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an-gleFor the rear lid to reopen completely, theopening angle must be reset and memorisedagain.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. Todo this, some force will have to be used.● Press the button ››› Fig. 82 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.● This resets and memorises the factory-setopening angle. Memorisation is indicated byblinking of the hazard warning lights and anaudible warning.

Automatic protection against overheatingIf the system is operated repeatedly in a shortspace of time, it automatically switches off toprevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the functioncan be reused. Until then, the rear lid can onlybe opened and closed by hand using reason-able force.

If the vehicle's battery is disconnected or thecorresponding fuse burns out while the rearlid is open, the system will have to be reset.This requires closing the rear lid completelyonce.

WARNINGIf a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or itis heavily loaded, the rear lid may not openor, after opening, it may lower by itself dueto the extra weight and cause serious in-jury.● Do not open the rear lid when there is alot of snow on it or when carrying a load(e.g. on a rack).● Before opening the rear lid, remove thesnow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlledopening and closing (Easy Open)*


Fig. 84 Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-ing (Easy Open).

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity ofthe rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open

104

Opening and closing

or close it by moving one foot in the area ofthe sensors located under the rear bumper.

● Switch the ignition off.● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in themiddle.● With a brisk movement, bring your foot andlower leg as close as you can to the bumper.The lower part of the leg needs to be close tothe upper sensor area and your foot must beclose to the lower sensor area ››› Fig. 84 1 .● Quickly remove your foot and lower legfrom the sensor areas ››› Fig. 84 2 . The rearlid will open automatically.● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-cedure after a few seconds.

The rear lid can be closed with another footmovement similar to the opening one (provi-ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity ofthe rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locksif the vehicle has been locked beforehandand there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either openingor closing), it can be stopped with anotherfoot movement similar to the opening one(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on-ly has limited availability in the following sit-uations (examples):

● If the rear bumper is very dirty.● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g.after having driven on gritted roads.● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is notcovered.● If the vehicle has been equipped at a latertime with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-ture may take a little longer to open the bootor may deactivate automatically, to avoid theboot opening by accident, e.g. because ofthe running water.

The Easy Open function can be permanentlyconnected and disconnected in the infotain-ment system using the > Exterior > Clos-ing button.

WARNINGIf there is a valid key in the proximity of therear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-tion may be accidentally activated and therear lid will open, for example, whensweeping under the rear bumper, when di-recting a water jet or high pressure steamto the area or when carrying out mainte-nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-dentally opened, the rear lid could injuresomebody situated in its area of operationor cause material damage.● Therefore, always make sure that there isno unsupervised valid key in the area nearthe rear lid.

● Before carrying out any maintenance orrepair work on the vehicle, always disablethe Easy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.● Before washing the vehicle, always disa-ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-ment system.● Before attaching a bike rack or hitching atrailer ››› page 275, always disable theEasy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.

105

Operation

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 85 Detail of the luggage compartment:emergency unlocking (Leon).

Fig. 86 Detail of the luggage compartment:emergency unlocking (Leon Sportstourer).

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside inthe event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartment● Insert the key blade into the slot and movethe key in the direction of the arrow until thelock unlocks ››› Fig. 85 ››› Fig. 86.

Window controls

Electrically opening and closingthe windows

Fig. 87 Detail of the driver's door: window con-trols.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door have been opened.

Safety switch *The safety control ››› Fig. 87 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

1

2

3

4

5

106

Opening and closing

Convenience open/close functionThe electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:● Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* have reached the desired position.● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-ton on the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all the win-dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-quired position.

Convenience closing:● Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* are closed ››› .● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the"lock" position until all the windows and thesunroof* are closed.● OR by means of the Keyless Access* (onlyclosing): Press and hold the locking sensorsurface ››› Fig. 89 (arrow) on the door handlefor several seconds to close the windows andthe sunroof*. If you release the sensor sur-face, the closing movement stops.

During convenience closing, first the windowsand then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

In the infotainment system different settingscan be adjusted using the function button

> Exterior > Windows > Convenience open-ing.

One-touch opening and closingThe one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to holdthe button of the corresponding electric win-dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pullthe button for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull onthe button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several at atime.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 100.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the »

107

Operation

windows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 108. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic closingwill stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the windowwill stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-

dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Elec-trically opening and closing the windowson page 107.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.

● Open or close the sunroof and the sunblind only when no one is in their path ofmovement.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.● Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle, espe-cially if they have access to the vehiclekey. If using they key unattended, theycould lock the vehicle, start the engine,switch on the ignition and activate the sun-roof.● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a shortspace of time provided that neither thedriver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION● To prevent damage, during winter tem-peratures remove any ice or snow thatmight be on the car roof before opening thesunroof or adjusting the tilt position.● Before leaving the vehicle or in case ofrainfall, always close the sunroof. With thesunroof open or in a tilted position, watercan enter the interior and can cause con-siderable damage to the electrical system.As a result, other damage can occur in thevehicle.

108

Opening and closing

Note● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-cumulate on the sunroof rails should beregularly cleaned away either by hand orwith a vacuum.● If the sunroof does not work correctly, theanti-trap function will not work either. Con-tact a specialised workshop.

Operating the sunroof

Fig. 88 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but-ton.

Functional area can be operated in twoways: sliding and pressing.

Sliding: The roof is opened or closed totallyor partially.

Pressing: The roof is raised, opened orclosed totally or partially. Press again to stopthe automatic movement.

Raising, opening and closing the sunroofOpening the sunroof:● Automatic movement: slide your fingerback over the functional area ››› Fig. 88 A .● Manual movement: slide back over thefunctional area and keep it there.

Closing the sunroof:● Automatic movement: slide your finger for-ward over the functional area A .● Manual movement: slide forward over thefunctional area and keep it there.

Raising the sunroof:● The sunroof can only be raised if it isclosed.● Automatic movement: press briefly in thecentre of the functional area B

Closing the sunroof when raised:● Automatic movement: slide your finger for-ward over the functional area A or pressbriefly in the centre of the functional area B .

Stop the automatic opening or closing move-ment:● Press again on the functional area .

Convenience function to open orclose the sunroof*

Fig. 89 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed withthe convenience function, just like the win-dows.

Using the door lock*● Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the unlocking or locking posi-tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-tion.

Using the remote control● Keep the locking or unlocking button press-ed to open or close the roof. If you release thebutton is the opening or closing will stop. »

109

Operation

Using the Keyless Access* system (onlyclosing)● Press and hold the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 89 (arrow) on the door handle to closethe sunroof. If you release the sensor surface,the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsunroof

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof ››› . If thesunroof encounters resistance or an obstaclewhen closing, it reopens immediately.

● Check why the sunroof did not close.● Try to close the sunroof again.● If the sunroof cannot be closed due to anobstacle or some resistance, it stops at thecorresponding position and then reopens. Forautomatic closing, a new closing attemptmight take place.● If the sunroof is still unable to close, close itwithout the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trapfunction● Before approx. 5 seconds after activation ofthe anti-trap function, slide your finger for-ward over the functional area

››› Fig. 88 A and keep pressed until the sun-roof is fully closed.● The sunroof closes without the anti-trapfunction intervening!● If the sunroof will still not close, visit a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGClosing the sunroof without the anti-trapfunction can cause serious injuries.● Always be careful when closing the sun-roof.● No person should ever remain in the wayof the sunroof, especially when closingwithout the anti-trap function.● The anti-trap function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body from be-coming trapped against the roof frame andinjuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light on.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 116.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112.

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on ››› page 114.

110

Lights

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 81.

Lighting and visibility buttons

Fig. 90 Dash panel: lights control.

By clicking on the button you can se-lect between (the corresponding indicatorlights up):

Switching on the dipped beam headlights.

Automatic control of dipped beam head-lights and daytime running lights.

Switching on the side lights.

Additionally, the following light functions canbe activated by pressing on the correspond-ing symbol.

When the function is activated, the corre-sponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it,you will need to press on the symbol again.

Turning the fog lights* on or off

Turning the rear fog lights on or off.

Connecting or disconnecting the wind-screen demisting function ››› page 147.

Connecting or disconnecting the heatedrear window ››› page 147.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control*The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the lamp is alight, the vehiclelights and the instrument panel and controls

automatically switch on in the following situa-tions ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights consist of individu-al lights, integrated in the front headlights.

The daytime running lights come on everytime the ignition is switched on if the lampsare off or the lamp is alight, if the lightsensor does not detect darkness. The day-light running lights turn off when the ignition isturned off.

When the lamp is alight, a light sensorautomatically switches dipped beam on andoff (including the control and instrumentlighting) or the daytime running lights de-pending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light*The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with LED High lights.

The function is connected and disconnectedvia the corresponding Infotainment systemmenu. »

111

Operation

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), thedipped beam immediately returns to its nor-mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the ignition is not connected and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 112.● When the lamp or is on.

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lightsare not bright enough to illuminate the road

ahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be-hind you. You should use the rear fog lightonly when visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 91 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Turning main beam headlights on: controllamp lit up on the instrument panel.The headlight flasher comes on while wepull the lever. Control lamp lit up.

Place the lever in rest position to turn off thecorresponding function.

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

1

2

3

4

112

Lights

The convenience turn signals are activatedand deactivated in the infotainment systemby means of the function button > Exterior> Lights > Convenience turn signals››› page 87.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni-tion off. If said light is on, an audible warningwill sound while the driver door is open.

● Switch the ignition off.● Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, thefront side light and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides● Switch the ignition off.● Press the button to select .● Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-lights light up, and additionally the tail lightswill do so partially.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● When you turn the ignition off withouthaving turned the turn signals off, anacoustic signal sounds while the driverdoor is open. This is intended as a reminderto switch off the turn signal, unless you wishto leave the parking light on.● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal willflash at double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.● The parking light does not activate auto-matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist automatically preventsglare from vehicles moving in the opposite di-rection or ahead in the same direction. In ad-dition, the main beam assist detects illumina-ted areas and disconnects the main beamheadlight when passing, e.g. by populatedareas.

Within its limitations, the assist system auto-matically connects or disconnects the main »

113

Operation

beam headlight depending on the environ-mental and traffic conditions, as well as thespeed ››› .

Switching the main beam assist on ● Turn on the ignition and select the mode in the lights panel ››› Fig. 90.● From the base position, press the turn signaland main beam headlights lever forwards››› Fig. 91 3 When the lamp is displayedon the instrument panel display, the mainbeam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off ● Disconnect the mode in the lights pan-el ››› Fig. 90.● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turnsignal light and main beam headlights leverforwards ››› Fig. 91 4 .● OR: push the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever forwards to manually turn onthe main beam. The main beam assist willthen be deactivated.

System limitationsIn the following cases, the main beam head-light must be switched off manually becausethe main beam assist will not disconnect it ontime or disconnect it at all:

● On roads with insufficient lighting with veryreflective signs

● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe-destrians or cyclists.● On closed curves, when the traffic in theopposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-nounced slopes or inclinations.● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-tion and with a central reservation barrierwhere the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv-ers.● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain● In the event of dust or sand storms● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-era's field of vision.● If the camera's field of vision is misted up,dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.● If the camera is damaged or if the powersupply has been cut off.

WARNINGThe convenience features of the mainbeam assist should not encourage the tak-ing of risks. The system is not a replace-ment for driver concentration.● You are always in control of the mainbeam and adapting it to the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.● It is possible that the main beam head-light control does not recognise all drivingsituations and is limited under certain cir-cumstances.

● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation ofthe main beam control may be affected.This also applies when changes are madeto the vehicle lighting system, for example,if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the field of vision of thecamera.

Note● The headlight flasher can be turned onand off manually at any time with the turnsignal and main beam lever ››› page 112.● If there are objects that radiate light inthe camera's area of influence, e.g. a port-able navigation system, this may affect theoperation of the main beam assist system.

114

Lights

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion*

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on andit is activated when driving at speeds belowapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

● If the steering wheel is turned or the turnsignal is switched on, the front fog light grad-ually turns on. After the turn, the corneringlight function is gradually switched off.● When engaging reverse gear, both front foglights turn on.

“Coming home” and “Leav-ing home” function

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it in thedark. When switched on, the front positionand dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” functionFor vehicles with light and rain sensors.● Turn off the vehicle and turn off the ignitionwith the lights in mode ››› page 111.● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The headlight turn-ing off time counts from when the last door orrear lid are closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turningoff time has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 111.● With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the lights are in mode and thelight sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”switch-on time ends (default 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the remotecontrol.● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 111.● With the ignition is switched on.

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” functions, the lamp on themain switch of the lights should be on andthe light sensor should detect darkness.

115

Operation

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 92 Dash panel: hazard warning lightsswitch

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several times persecond to warn the vehicles driving behind. Ifyou continue braking, the hazard warninglights will come on automatically when thevehicle comes to a standstill. They switch offautomatically when the vehicle starts tomove again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-ard warning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never parkin an area where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with highly inflam-mable materials, for example dry grass orspilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Dynamic headlight range control3 Valid for vehicles fitted with a High lights

The headlight range is automatically adjus-ted according to the vehicle load status whenthey are switched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

116

Lights

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the head-light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-justment of the headlights to avoid dazzlingother drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution. Thisis known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the headlights allowsthe specific “tourist light” values to be metwithout the need for stickers or changes be-ing made to the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel,displays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and controls can be adjus-ted in the infotainment system, using the

function button > Interior > Lighting››› page 87.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the analogue instrument panel lightingremains activated in daytime light conditions.The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the function ac-tive, the instrument panel lighting may evenswitch off. The objective of this function is toprovide the driver with a visual indication thathe or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 93 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of thepassenger compartment.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Door contact connection.The interior lights come on automaticallywhen you unlock the vehicle, open a dooror disconnect the ignition.The light goes out a few seconds afterclosing all the doors, when locking the ve-hicle or connecting the ignition.

Reading lightThe reading light is tactile, each lens is turnedon and off individually by pressing in the re-spective central area. In addition, the intensi-ty of the light can be adjusted according tothe pressure exerted.

If you want to turn on the two lenses togetheryou must press the symbol ››› Fig. 93.

Glove compartment and luggage com-partment lighting*When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side and therear lid, the respective light will automaticallyswitch on and off.

Footwell lighting*The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. This intensitycan be adjusted through the infotainment »

117

Operation

system menu using the function button >Interior > Lighting ››› page 87).

Note● The reading lights go out when the vehi-cle is closed and locked or after a few mi-

nutes of turning the ignition off. This pre-vents the battery from discharging.

Ambient light*

Fig. 94 Schematic representation: Ambient light

The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console, the footwell area and, de-pending on the version, the front door panelsand the instrument panel line.

There are predefined Ambient Light versions››› Fig. 94. The intensity of the lighting can beadjusted using the function button :

● Automatic: lights up the interior of the vehi-cle depending on the selected driving mode.

● Manual: to adjust the intensity of the ambi-ent light in each of the areas as well as tochange the colour in the versions that havelighting on the front door panel and the in-strument panel line.● Off: turns off the ambient light.

NoteIn some versions, the colour indicated onthe Infotainment screen may not match the

actual colour of the vehicle's interior light-ing.

118

Visibility

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 95 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 95 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow sweep adjustable by using con-trol ››› Fig. 95 A .

3 Fast sweep adjustable by using control››› Fig. 95 A .


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by push-ing the lever towards the steeringwheel, and the wipers operate simulta-neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-er will wipe the window approximatelyevery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the heatingand ventilation system. The windscreenwasher fluid could otherwise freeze on thewindscreen and obscure your view of theroad.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 48.

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

119

Operation

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreenwiper in position 1 or 2, it will automaticallychange to a lower position speed. The setspeed will be resumed when the vehicle pullsaway.● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds in air recirculation modewhen the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it doesnot thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient tempera-ture.

Note● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob-stacles that are on the windscreen. Thewiper will stop moving if the obstacleblocks its path. Remove the obstacle andswitch the wiper back on again.

● The windscreen will be wiped again ap-proximately 5 seconds after the wind-screen washer has been activated, provi-ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-onds after the “drip” function, a new washsequence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 96 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 97 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending on theamount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rainsensor can be adjusted manually. Manualwipe ››› page 119.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 96:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor remains active andstarts operating again when the windscreenwipers are in position 1 and the vehicle istravelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

0

1

A

120

Visibility

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 97 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activa-tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-sult in a fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an excessively longwipe when the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-duction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Regularly clean the sensitive surface ofthe rain sensor ››› Fig. 97 (arrow) and checkfor possible damage to the wiper blades.● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alco-hol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you

come into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soonas possible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

121

Operation

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 98 Detail of the driver's door: control forthe exterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position,adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,left) and the passenger side (R, right) tothe direction desired.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.Folding in mirrors.

L/R

Synchronized regulation of the exteriormirrorsIn the infotainment system, using the functionbutton > Interior > Rear view mirrors, theexterior rear view mirrors can be selected toadjust in a synchronised manner.

● Turn the knob to position L1).● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

Tilt function for front passenger exteriormirror*When parking backwards, and in order to beable to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-ror can be automatically tilted towards thepassenger to provide a better view of thekerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position assoon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-turns to its original position if the position ofthe control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for thetilt function● Switch the ignition on.● In the infotainment system, select > Inte-rior > Rear view mirrors ››› page 87.● Select the R1) position on the control.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror sothat you can see, for example, the kerb areawell.● Release the reverse gear.● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*In the infotainment system, using the functionbutton > Interior > Rear view mirrors, theexterior rear view mirrors can be selected tofold in when the vehicle is parked and locked››› page 87.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-tomatically. When the vehicle is opened withthe remote control, the exterior mirrors aredeployed automatically.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-metrical.

122

Visibility

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and furtheraway than they really are. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmisjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror.● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTION● If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma-noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors isknocked out of position, the mirrors mustfirst be fully retracted with the electriccontrol. The rear view mirror must not beplaced by hand in the starting position, asthe folding mechanism can be damaged.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to foldthe exterior mirrors in to prevent them frombeing damaged. Electrically retractableexterior mirrors must not be folded in or out

by hand, always use the electrical powercontrol.

Note● If the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 99 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 99 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with acover. When the cover is opened 2 a lightcomes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

NoteThe light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

123

Operation

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the frontseats

Fig. 100 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

1

2

3

4

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclinationof the front seats only when their move-ment area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNINGIncorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-ers might cause an accidental activation ofthe electrical seat adjustment system andmake it move unexpectedly while driving.This might cause loss of control of the vehi-cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-over, the electrical components of the frontseats might be damaged.● Never attach or place seat upholstery orcovers on the electric controls.● Never use upholstery or seat covers thathave not been explicitly authorised for theseats of the vehicle.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-sembly of the headrests are described below.Always make sure that the seats are correctlyadjusted ››› page 13.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. Thecentral rear headrest is only intended for thecentral seat of the rear bench. Therefore, donot install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrestAdjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head andunder no circumstances below eye level.Keep the back of your head always as closeto the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short peopleLower the headrest completely, even if yourhead is below its upper edge. In the lowestposition, there may be a small distance be-tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall peoplePush the headrest up as far as it will go.

124

Seats and headrests

WARNINGIf travelling with the headrests removed orimproperly adjusted, the risk of severe orfatal injuries in the event of accidents andsudden braking or manoeuvres increases.● Always travel with the headrest correctlyinstalled and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the head-rest correctly based on your height, alwaysmaking sure that its upper edge is at thesame height as the top of the head, butnever below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the headrestas possible and centred.● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-cle is in motion.● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the headrests arein the non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling theheadrests, do not let them meet the top lin-ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the frontseat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,this could damage the vehicle.

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 101 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 102 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests● Grab the sides of the headrests with bothhands and push upwards to the desired posi-tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the button on the side 1 ››› Fig. 101››› Fig. 102.

● The headrest must lock correctly in one po-sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 103 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press the side button ››› Fig. 101 1 and re-move the headrest.● To refit, insert the headrest into the holes inthe backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrestsTo remove the headrest, the correspondingbackrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 126. »

125

Operation

● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 103 1 , while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2 witha flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,and remove the headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 126.

Fitting the rear headrestsTo mount the external headrests, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 126.● Insert the headrest bars into the guides untilthey perceptibly engage. It should not bepossible to remove the headrest from thebackrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 126.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions

Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest

Fig. 104 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt inplace.

Fig. 105 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

Folding the backrest forwards● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip››› Fig. 104.● Completely lower the rear headrests››› page 125.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 105 1 for-wards and at the same time fold the backrestdown. The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 is visi-ble.

Converting the table to a seat● Raise and lock in the back rest. The redmarking on the tab 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feetand other body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rearbackrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in a

126

Seats and headrests

seat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will fly forward, along with thebackrest, during an accident or a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre.● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child).

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,always adjust the front seats so that nei-ther the headrests nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Lowering the rear seat backrestwith the remote release lever


Fig. 106 In the luggage compartment: leversto unlock the rear backrest.

● Lower the head restraint properly.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the remote release lever of the left part››› Fig. 106 1 or right part 2 of the backrestin the direction of the arrow. The releasedpart of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-matically down and forwards.● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 105 2 isvisible.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 107 Front centre armrest

To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di-rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 107 up or step bystep depending on the desired opening.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highestposition. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-ward ››› Fig. 107 or backward as much aspossible in the direction of the correspondingarrow.

WARNINGThe front centre armrest may obstruct thedriver's arm movements, which couldcause an accident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion. »

127

Operation

● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-rest while the vehicle is in motion, not evena child. This position is incorrect and maycause severe injuries.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage inthe vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 275 and onthe roof ››› page 138. When doing so, pleaseconsider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy ob-jects in the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum authorisedweight per axle, as well as the maximum au-thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 334.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 133.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure adhesive of the tyres››› page 310.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre pressurecontrol system, adjust to the new load statusif necessary ››› page 314.

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-ly.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the dashboard.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely.

128

Transport and practical equipment

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartmentthat are unsecured could move suddenlyand modify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available fromaccessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 108 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 109 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf. »

129

Operation

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 108 B fromtheir hooks A .● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 109 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 130.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 109 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 108 B to the rear lid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-

rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

Store the rear shelf3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 110 In the luggage compartment: coversfor storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 111 In the luggage compartment: fittingthe rear shelf.

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 110.● Place the rear shelf in the correspondinghousing ››› Fig. 111.● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

130


Retractable shelf3 Valid for: Leon Sportstourer

Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: unroll-ing and rolling up the shelf.

Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the shelf.

Extending the shelf● Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its handle››› Fig. 112 1 in a backwards direction untilit audibly clicks into place.

Retracting the rear shelf● Press on the handle of the rear shelf in thedirection of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 112.

The shelf will automatically move towardsthe end and will retract completely.

Removing the shelf● Press the rear shelf support ››› Fig. 113 1 inthe direction of the arrow.● Pull the rear shelf up and out of the support.● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor when the

latter is in the top position (except for vehiclesequipped with natural gas engine CNG)››› page 132.

Fitting the shelf● Place the rear shelf in the housing providedin the left or right side cover.● Engage the support of the rear shelf››› Fig. 113 1 into the housing on the otherside.● Check that the support is properly engag-ed.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never carry animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTIONTo retract the rear shelf, press on its handlein a downwards only direction; if you pressit upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.

131

Operation

Storing the retractable shelf3 Valid for: Leon Sportstourer

Fig. 114 In the luggage compartment: spaceto store the retractable shelf.

Fig. 115 In the luggage compartment: spaceto store the retractable shelf.

The retractable shelf can be stored under theluggage compartment variable floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 114A .

● Press the head of the retractable shelf inthe direction of the arrow until it engages inits housing ››› Fig. 115.● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Variable luggage compartmentfloor

Fig. 116 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 117 Variable luggage compartment floor:inclined position.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 116 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 116 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 .

132


Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kitarea.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position us-ing handle ››› Fig. 116 1 , pull it up and push ittowards the backrest of the rear seats until itfolds along the hinge line and the movablepart of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 117 (ar-rows).

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 100 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefully

guide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 118 In the luggage compartment: fixedand deployable fastening rings.

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 118 on thefront and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-jects and luggage with fastening belts andcords.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fa-tal injuries.● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.

● Tighten the belts and straps in a crosslayout over the load placed on the bootfloor and secure them to the fastening ringssafely.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained fromspecialised dealerships. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

133

Operation

Net bag*3 Valid for: Leon Sportstourer

Fig. 119 In the luggage compartment: net baghooked up at floor level.

Fig. 120 In the luggage compartment: rings1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents lightluggage from moving. The net bag has a zipand can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggagecompartment floorIf necessary, the front eyes must be unfoldedfirst ››› page 133 .

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 and 2 ››› Fig. 119 ››› . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-old● Secure the short net hooks to the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 120 1 ››› . The bag zip shouldbe facing upwards.● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bagThe hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fasteningrings.● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-ing rings of the boot it must be stretchedout. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bagis hooked up or unhooked incorrectly thehooks could cause injuries.

● Always secure the bag hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from thefastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks arereleased suddenly.● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unfastenedsuddenly, this may cause injuries.

134


Bag hooks

Fig. 121 In the luggage compartment: baghooks (Leon).

Fig. 122 In the luggage compartment: baghooks (Leon Sportstourer).

There may be hooks for hanging bags onboth sides of the luggage compartment››› Fig. 121.

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

WARNINGNever use the hooks to hang luggage orother objects. In case of sudden braking oran accident, the hooks could break.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-jects*

Fig. 123 In the rear seat backrest: opening thetrapdoor.

Fig. 124 In the luggage compartment: openingthe trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting long itemsin the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard● Lower the centre armrest.● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 123 1 down and forwards.● Open the rear lid.● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.● Secure the objects with the seat belt. »

135

Operation

● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.● Close the rear lid.● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

NoteThe tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press therelease lever down, in the direction of thearrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 124.

Net partition*

Using the separation net behindthe rear seat*


Fig. 125 In the luggage compartment: secur-ing the net partition.

Fig. 126 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the net partition.

Pulling out and securing the net partition● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 125 2 to remove thenet from the casing 4 .● Hook in the net partition on the right or leftside 3 (magnified image).● Hook in the net partition into the housing onthe other side 1 by pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings 3 and 1 .

Retracting the net partition● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and

1 .● Roll up the net into the casing 4 lowering itwith your hand.

Removing the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Press the left or right release catch››› Fig. 126 in the direction of the arrow 1 .● Remove the casing from the support in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 126 2 .

Fitting the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Fit the casing in the right and left supports.● Press the casing into the left and right sup-ports in the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 126 2 until it engages.

136


The red markings on the release buttonsshould no longer be visible.

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when thenet partition is properly assembled.● There should be nobody behind the as-sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-ing.● The attachments on the backs of the rearseats must never be used to fit the net par-tition when the rear seat backs are in theirvertical position.

CAUTIONIncorrect handling of the net partitioncould cause damage.● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicleparts could be damaged. Roll down the netpartition by hand.

Using the net partition while therear seat backs are folded down


Fig. 127 Assembling the net partition in therear seat backrests.

Fig. 128 In the luggage compartment: net par-tition hooked in place with the rear seat backsfolded down.

Fitting the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Remove the net partition from the side sup-ports.● Place the net casing in the rail slots in thedirection of the arrows ››› Fig. 127 1 .● Push the casing towards the left side of thevehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 127 2and as far as it will go.● Check that the net is secure.

Pulling out and securing the net partition● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 128 2 to remove thenet from the casing ››› Fig. 128 4 .● Hook in the net partition on the right or leftside ››› Fig. 128 3 (magnified image).● Hook in the net partition into the housing onthe other side ››› Fig. 128 1 by pulling therod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings ››› Fig. 128 3 and

1 .

Retracting the net partition● Remove the rod from the housings in thetrims of the roof side members.● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 128 4lowering it with your hand. »

137

Operation

Removing the net partition● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cmin the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 127 2 .● Remove the casing from the rails by pullingin the opposite direction to the arrows››› Fig. 127 1 .● Lift the rear seat backrests.

WARNINGDuring a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-jects could be flung though the interior andcause serious or fatal injuries.● Always secure objects, even when thenet partition is properly assembled.● There should be nobody behind the as-sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-ing.

WARNINGThe rear seat backrests should only be lif-ted again once the net partition has beendisassembled.

CAUTIONIncorrect handling of the net partitioncould cause damage.● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicle

parts could be damaged. Roll down the netpartition by hand.

Roof carrier

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Cross bars, the roof carrier system andthe load secured on them should not inter-fere with the roof aerial or hamper the pathof the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

138


Securing the crossbars and theroof carrier system

Fig. 129 Attachment points for the roof railingsfor the roof carrier system (Leon).

Fig. 130 Roof railings for the roof carrier sys-tem (Leon Sportstourer).

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards

or boats on the roof. Suitable accessoriescan be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

LeonThe front and rear attachment points 1 and

2 are only visible when the doors are open››› Fig. 129.

Leon SportstourerThe crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum permissible roof load is 50 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions. »

139

Operation

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects inside the vehicle that are not se-cured could be thrown across the cabin inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring. This may cause severe injuries aswell as loss of control of the vehicle.● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard orheavy items in open storage compartmentsof the vehicle, on the dashboard or on thecover behind the rear seats, or insidepieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-cle.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.

● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. Thiscould lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particular-ly during the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materi-als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suction

140


pads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 131 On the front passenger side: glovecompartment.

Opening and closing the glove compart-mentOpening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 131 and openthe glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the eventof an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.

● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Storage compartment under frontseats*

Fig. 132 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handleand take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat untilit engages.

Depending on the equipment, under the driv-er's seat there may be a magazine holder*(about the size of the instruction manual) in-stead of the storage compartment.

WARNINGIf the drawer is left open, it could preventuse of the pedals. This may cause seriousaccidents and injuries.● Always keep the drawer closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawerand any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTIONThe drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Drink holder

Fig. 133 In the rear central armrest: drinksholder.

The storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder. »

141

Operation

Front drink holdersThere are two cup holders in the centre con-sole .

Drinks holder in the rear central armrestUse: Lower the centre armrest.

When the drink holder is no longer in use, liftthe armrest again.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries.● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the ve-hicle due to cold or heat.

● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high or verylow.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it maydamage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-cle:

● In the centre console.● In the upper part of the glove compartment.The load of the compartment should not ex-ceed 1.2 kg.● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doorsand the rear.

WARNINGHanging clothes may decrease the driver'svisibility, which may cause serious acci-dents and injuries.● Always hang clothes from hangers insuch a way that the driver's visibility is notaffected.● Only hang light pieces of clothing fromthe hangers of the vehicle. Never leaveheavy, hard or sharp objects in the pocketsof these pieces of clothing.● Do not use clothes hangers to hang upthe clothing, as this could interfere with thefunction of the head-protection airbags.

142


Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 134 12 volt power socket: 1 in the frontarmrest, 2 in the luggage compartment.

Fig. 135 On the left side of the luggage com-partment: 230 volt power socket.

In the front armrest● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 134 1 .● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

In the luggage compartment*● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 134 2 .● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con-sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket.

Make sure that the maximum power con-sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex-ceeded. The power consumption of devices isshown on the model plate.

When connecting two or more electrical de-vices at the same time, make sure that theirtotal consumption never exceeds 190 watts››› .

230 volt power socket*With the engine running, the power socket››› Fig. 135 activates automatically as soonas a connector is plugged in. If there isenough power available, the socket can stillbe used while the engine is off ››› Connect an electrical device: Open the cov-er and insert the plug into the power socket

as far as possible to unlock the built-in childlock. The socket only supplies power oncethe child lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket

Steady greenlight:

The childproof lock is unlocked.The socket is ready to operate.

Flashing greenlight:

The ignition is switched off, butthere is enough power availableto continue supplying the socketwith current for a maximum of 10minutes. If the connector is un-plugged before this time elap-ses, the socket is disconnectedand cannot be used again untilthe ignition is switched on again.

Flashing redlight:

There is an anomaly, e.g. dis-connection due to a currentsurge or overheating.

Disconnection due to overheatingWhen the temperature exceeds a certain val-ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati-cally disconnected. The disconnection pre-vents overheating when the power consump-tion of the connected devices is excessive orthe ambient temperature is very high. The230-volt power supply can be used onceagain after a cooling time. First unplug theconnector of the connected device and thenplug it back in again. This prevents the elec-trical device from being switched on again ifthis is not wanted. »

143

Operation

WARNINGThe electrical system is under high voltage!● Do not spill liquids onto the socket.● Do not plug adapters or extension cordsinto the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,the integrated child lock will be unlockedand the power socket will operate.● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-ting needle, for example) into the 230 voltpower socket.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should there-fore not be left in the vehicle unattended ifthe button is also left behind. Otherwisethere is a possibility that they may be in-jured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

CAUTION● 230 volt power socket:– Do not leave devices or connectors

that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)hanging directly from the power sock-et.

– Do not connect neon lamps.

– Only connect devices to the socket ifthe device and socket voltage match.

– The built-in overload disconnect func-tion prevents any electrical devicesthat require a high start-up currentfrom turning on. In this case, unplug theelectrical device's power supply andre-try the connection after about 10seconds.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a batterydischarge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the USB ports toprotect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.● Some appliances may not work properlywhen connected to the 230 volt socketsdue to a lack of power (watts).

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

Introduction

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airconditioning systems can be:

● Climatronic of 1 zone: heats, ventilates,cools and dehumidifies the passenger com-partment considering it as a single air condi-tioning area.● Climatronic of 3 zones: heats, ventilates,cools and dehumidifies the passenger com-partment considering it as 3 independent airconditioning areas (driver, front passengerand rear seats).

The Climatornic operates most effectivelywith the windows and the sunroof* closed.

Activate the function in the Infotainment Sys-tem by pressing on the corresponding icon.

The Infotainment System screen icon will lightup to indicate that the respective function isactivated or will redirect you to a submenu,as appropriate.

Some functions and menu tabs depend onthe equipment.

144

Air conditioning

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrieragainst impurities in the air taken into the ve-hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas with very high levels of air pollu-tion, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioner and heated rear window to maintaingood visibility.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the air conditioner off if you thinkit may be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT Official Serv-ice.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, SEATrecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe function button . The icon shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is only

available when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots inthe luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected,a Technical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

145

Operation

Climatronic control

Fig. 136 Schematic representation: air condition-ing functions

A ClimabarFixed bar at the top of the Infotainment Sys-tem screen ››› Fig. 136 A , (even if it is discon-nected) where the following Air Conditioningfunctions are located:

Shows fan status/speed. By pressing it, youcan access the Air conditioning menu››› page 147.

.°CSlide your finger from left to right or vice ver-sa over the numbers to adjust the desiredtemperature.

Press on the same numbers to access thetemperature adjustment submenu.

Or: use the touch zones 1 and 2 (blue /red) to adjust the temperature of the Air Con-ditioning ››› Fig. 136.

Access the seat heating* submenu››› page 150.

Switching air recirculation on and off››› page 149

Temperature setting submenuSubmenu where the following functions arefound:

.°CSlide your finger from left to right or vice ver-sa over the bar, or, press or to adjust thedesired temperature. In versions with 1-zoneClimatronic, only one temperature can beset.

Synchronise the temperature on the driver'sside with the rest of the zones (only versionswith 3-zone Climatronic).

146

Air conditioning

Air Conditioning Menu

Fig. 137 Schematic representation: Air condition-ing menu.

Within the Air Conditioning menu, the follow-ing submenus are found depending on theequipment:

Front SubmenuSubmenu for the air conditioning in the frontof the passenger compartment where the fol-lowing functions are found:

Connect/disconnect the Climatronic››› Fig. 137 A .

Air diffuser outlets (arrows)Selection of the air distribution to one or moreof the following areas: feet, upper body orwindscreen.

In the 3-zone Climatronic versions, it is selec-ted by pressing on the desired arrow. In the 1-zone Climatronic versions, it is selected bypressing on the desired distribution icon.

The colour represented by the arrows doesnot indicate the outlet temperature of the air,but the requested temperature depending onthe surrounding conditions.

Manual adjustment of fan speed by pressing or .

Activate or deactivate the steering wheelheating*.

It also shows its status (on/off).

You may also use the multifunction steeringwheel to manage the heating levels in addi-tion to turning it on/off ››› page 151.

The defrost/demist function of the Climatron-ic removes ice and condensation from thewindscreen. The air is dehumidified and thefan is set high.

The heated rear window only works when theengine is running and switches off automati-cally after a maximum of 10 minutes. It should »

147

Operation

be switched off as soon as the glass is demis-ted.

By saving electrical power you can also savefuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Switching the cooling and demisting systemon/off.

In mode, the selected temperature willremain constant. Fan speed and air distribu-tion are automatically adjusted.

The mode will be deactivated when thefan speed and/or the air distribution aremodified manually.

Fan speed in mode can be adjusted inthe Climaprofile (low, medium or high) bysuccessive presses on the function button.

Climaprofile adjustment is also possible in theSettings submenu.

Rear Submenu (only for versions with 3-zone Climatronic)Submenu for the air conditioning in the rear ofthe passenger compartment where the fol-lowing functions are found:

Switching the rear area air conditioningon/off.

With the icon lit up, it is not possible to adjustthe temperature from the rear area.

.°CAdjusting the temperature of the rear area bypressing on the icons or .

IClimate submenu*Submenu where different smart and/or auto-matic functionalities are located:

Warm hands: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to heatthe steering wheel area.Cool feet: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to coolthe footwell area.Defog the windows: automatically ad-justs for a certain time the air condition-ing to defog the windscreen.

Warm feet: automatically adjusts for acertain time the air conditioning to heatthe footwell area.Fresh Air: automatically adjusts for a cer-tain time the air conditioning to ventilatethe passenger compartment.

AirCare Climate submenuThe air conditioning system contains a filterthat can reduce the penetration of allergeniccontaminants.

When the Air Care function is activated, therecirculation mode is on and the air is regula-ted automatically and continuously, as longas there is no detection of fogging hazard.

● Press on to activate/deactivate theAirCare function.● Press to access the information on thestatus of the AirCare system.

Settings submenuSubmenu where the following settings are lo-cated:

● Automatic recirculation: to switch automat-ic air recirculation on and off ››› page 149.● Climaprofile: To adjust the fan speed (low,medium or high) during operation in mode.

148

Air conditioning

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasinfluence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioning operates most effective-ly with the windows and the sunroof* closed.However, if the passenger compartment hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by briefly opening the windows and thesunroof*.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron-ic)The temperature display can be changedfrom Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotain-ment system screen using the function button > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.● The air conditioner fuse has blown.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist overthe windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents mustremain open.

● To close the air vents on the left side, movethe corresponding diffuser vent lever fully tothe right. To close the air vents on the rights

side, move the corresponding diffuser ventlever fully to the left.● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel, in the footwells and inthe rear area of the passenger compartment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, the air recirculation is dis-connected when is pressed.

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation. »

149

Operation

Climatronic automatic air recirculationmodeWith the automatic air recirculation mode ac-tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-terior is enabled. If the system detects a highconcentration of hazardous substances in theambient air, air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically. When the level of impuritiesdrops to within a normal range, recirculationmode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

● Automatic air recirculation is activated anddeactivated in the Air conditioning settingsmenu ››› page 146.

Front seat heating*

With the engine on, the front seat cushion andbackrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heatingPress the icon on the Climabar to viewthe seat heating menu.

● Press the left or right seat icon to connectthe seat heating to maximum power.● Press the left or right seat icon repeatedlyuntil the desired level is adjusted.

● To switch off seat heating, press the corre-sponding seat icon several times until no LEDis on.

If the ignition is switched on again in approx.the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating isautomatically turned on to the level set thelast time.

Cases in which the heat seating shouldnot be switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-er than +25°C (77°F).

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or havea limited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

150

Air conditioning

Steering wheel heating*

Steering wheel heating works only with theengine running.

Steering wheel heating levelsThe selected flywheel heating level will bedisplayed on the instrument panel display.

Level control is carried out using the buttonon the multifunction steering wheel:

● Brief press (less than 1 second): the heatingis switched on at maximum level. Press thesteering wheel button repeatedly until thedesired level is adjusted. To switch off seatheating, press the steering wheel button re-peatedly until the heated steering wheel OFFicon is displayed on the instrument panel.● Long press (more than 1 second): the heat-ing is switched off directly from the level thatis currently operating. If the steering wheelbutton is pressed again for a long period, theheating is switched on directly at the last lev-el saved before switching off.

Automatic offThe steering wheel heating will be switchedoff automatically when any of the followingconditions are met:

● Power consumption is too high.● The steering wheel heating system is faulty.

● If the ignition is switched off.

Parking ventilation*

With the parking ventilation function, the pas-senger compartment can be ventilated inspring/summer.

The power required for parking ventilation willbe provided by the vehicle's 12V battery.

Connecting parking ventilationThe control and ignition of the parking venti-lation function will be carried out through theSEAT CONNECT mobile App:

● The parking ventilation function will beturned on through the immediate power but-ton on that App.● By programming a departure time.

In the event of low level charge of the 12Vbattery, the parking ventilation will not turnon.

Disconnecting parking ventilationThe parking ventilation will turn off in the fol-lowing situations:

● When the operating time selected by theuser in the App for the immediate turn onmode has ended.

● When the scheduled departure time hasbeen reached.

The maximum operating period of the park-ing ventilation is 60 min.

Programming a departure/trip startThe activation of the parking ventilation for ascheduled time is only valid for a single venti-lation process. The departure time must befor each newly programmed ventilation proc-ess.

Before programming the departure time, youmust check that the date and time of the carare correctly set.

When programming a departure time, the carautomatically calculates, depending on theenvironmental conditions, the necessary op-erating time of the parking ventilation.

CAUTIONFoods sensitive to heat or cold, medica-tions and other objects can be damagedby the airflow.● Do not place any type of food, medicinesor other temperature sensitive items infront of the ventilation slots.

NoteIf parking ventilation works repeatedly forlong periods of time, the 12V batterycharge level will drop. It is advisable to take »

151

Operation

the vehicle for a long drive to recharge thebattery.

152

Introduction

Infotainment System

Introduction

First steps

Introduction

Infotainment functions and settings dependon the country and equipment

Before first useBefore the first use, bear in mind the followingpoints, to take full advantage of the functionsand settings offered:

● Observe the basic safety warnings››› page 153.● Reset the Infotainment factory settings.● Search and store favourite radio stations onthe preset buttons so you can tune themquickly.● Use only suitable audio sources and datamedia.● Pair a mobile phone to use the phone man-agement through the Infotainment System.● Use current maps for navigation.● Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor-responding services.

Current documentation attachedFor using infotainment and its components,take into account, together with this instruc-tion manual, the following documentation:

● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-boarddocumentation.● Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de-vice or audio sources.● Operating instructions for data media andexternal players.● Manuals for the Infotainment accessoriessubsequently installed or used additionally.● Description of services when running SEATCONNECT services.

Safety instructions

Some function areas may include links tothird-party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not theowner of the third-party websites accessiblethrough the links, and assumes no liability fortheir content.

Some function areas may include outside in-formation from third-party providers. SEAT,S.A. is not responsible for such informationbeing correct, up-to-date or complete, or forensuring it does not infringe the rights of thirdparties.

Radio stations and owners of data media andaudio sources are responsible for the infor-mation they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tallbuildings, mountains or due to the operationof other electrical devices, such as chargers,can also interfere with the reception of the ra-dio signal.

Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on theantenna and on the window panes can inter-fere with radio reception.

WARNINGThe infotainment central computer is inter-connected with the control units mountedon the vehicle. Therefore, there is a seriousdanger of accident and injury if the centralcomputer is repaired or disassembled andreassembled incorrectly.● Never replace the central computer withanother used, recycled or from another ve-hicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassem-bly of the central computer should only becarried out at specialised workshops. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.

WARNINGThe factory assembled radio with integra-ted software is interconnected with thecontrol units mounted on the vehicle. »

153

Infotainment System

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci-dent and injury if the radio is repaired ordisassembled and reassembled incorrect-ly.● Never replace the radio with another ra-dio that is used, recycled or from anothervehicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassem-bly of the radio should only be carried outat specialised workshops. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNINGAny distraction affecting the driver in anyway can lead to an accident and cause in-juries. Reading the information on thescreen and managing the infotainment sys-tem can distract your attention from trafficand cause an accident.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing an audiosource or data media while driving can dis-tract your attention from the traffic andcause an accident.

WARNINGSelect volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services si-rens).● Hearing may be impaired if using too higha volume setting, even if only for short peri-ods of time.

WARNINGThe following circumstances may result inan emergency call, phone call or datatransmission not being made or being inter-rupted:● When in areas with zero or insufficientmobile telephony or GPS signal. Also intunnels, confined areas between very tallbuildings, garages, underpasses, moun-tains and valleys.● When in areas with sufficient mobilephone or GPS signal, the telephony net-work of the telecommunications providerhas interference or is not available.● When the vehicle components necessaryto make emergency calls, phone calls andto transmit data are damaged, do not workor do not have sufficient electrical power.● When the battery of the mobile phonedevice is discharged or its charge level isinsufficient.

WARNINGIn some countries and some telephone net-works it is only possible to make an emer-gency call, if a mobile telephone device is

connected to the telephone interface ofthe vehicle, inside it there is an “unlocked”SIM card with sufficient balance to makecalls and with sufficient network signalcoverage.

WARNINGRead and observe the operating instruc-tions provided by the manufacturer inquestion when using mobile phone devices,data media, external devices, external au-dio and multimedia sources.

WARNINGPosition the connection cables of the audiosources and external devices so that theydo not interfere with the driver.

WARNINGWhen changing or connecting an audio ormultimedia source may cause suddenchanges in the volume.● Lower the volume before connecting orswitching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNINGIf mobile phone and radiocommunicationdevices are used without connection to anexternal antenna, the maximum electro-magnetic radiation levels inside the vehiclemight be surpassed, thus posing a risk tothe health of the driver and passengers.

154

Introduction

This is also the case if the external antennahas not been correctly installed.● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-tres between the antennas of the mobilephone device and an active medical de-vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobilephones might alter the functioning of thesedevices.● Do not carry a mobile phone switched onvery close or directly on top of an activemedical device, for instance in a chestpocket.● Immediately turn off the mobile phone ifyou suspect it is causing interferences in anactive medical device or any other medicaldevice.

WARNINGMobile phones, external devices and ac-cessories that are loose or not properly se-cured could move around the passengercompartment during a sudden driving orbraking manoeuvre or an accident andcause damage or injury.● Set mobile phone devices, external devi-ces and their accessories outside the air-bag deployment areas or store them se-curely.

WARNINGThe centre armrest may obstruct the driv-er's arm movements, which could cause anaccident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

WARNINGIf the light conditions are not good and thescreen is damaged or dirty, the indicationsand information displayed on the screenmay not be read or be read incorrectly.● The indications and information dis-played on the screen should never induceto take any risk that compromises safety.The screen is not a replacement for driverawareness.

WARNINGRadio stations can transmit disaster or haz-ard announcements. The following condi-tions prevent such notices from being re-ceived or issued:● When in areas with zero or insufficient ra-dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areasbetween very tall buildings, garages, un-derpasses, mountains and valleys.● When the frequency bands of the radiostation have interference or are not availa-ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-ception.

● When the speakers and the vehicle com-ponents necessary for radio reception aredamaged, do not work or do not have suffi-cient electrical power.● When the infotainment is switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off mobile phone devices in areaswith a risk of explosion!

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs, signalling systems, trafficregulations and local circumstances pre-vail over driving recommendations andnavigation system indications.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Certain circumstances can significantlyinitially planned lengthen both the durationof the trip and the route to the destination,or even temporarily prevent navigation toit, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, themobile device in question must be switchedoff at all times. The radiation produced by »

155

Infotainment System

a mobile phone device when switched onmay interfere with sensitive technical and

medical equipment, possibly resulting inmalfunction or damage to the equipment.

NoteIf the playback volume is excessive or dis-torted, the speakers may be damaged.

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 138 Overview: control unit and indication inthe 10-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment functionscan be used through the screen.HOME button (to open the home page).

1

2

Direct access button to the assist sys-tems and vehicle settings.Touch zone (to turn the infotainment sys-tem on or off).

3

4

Touch zones (to raise and lower the airconditioning temperature).Touch zones (to raise and lower the vol-ume).

5

6

156

Introduction

Media System

Fig. 139 Overview: control unit and indication inthe 8.25-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment functionscan be used through the screen.Rotary push button (to adjust the volumeand to turn the infotainmet on/off)Rotary push button (to search and select)HOME button (to open the home page)Entertainment ››› page 178Telephone ››› page 192Full Link ››› page 169Vehicle information ››› page 86

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Vehicle settings ››› page 879

157

Infotainment System

General instructions for use

Operating indications

● The infotainment needs a few seconds forthe complete start-up of the system and dur-ing that time it does not react to inputs. Onlythe image of the rear view camera* systemcan be displayed during system start-up.● The display of all indications and the exe-cution of functions only takes place once theinfotainment system has finished booting. Theduration of the system booting depends onthe number of infotainment functions andmay take longer than normal in the event ofvery high or very low temperatures.● When using the infotainment system andcorresponding accessories, e.g., head-phones, bear in mind country-specific regu-lations and legal provisions.● Some functions of the infotainment systemrequire an active SEAT CONNECT user ac-count and an Internet connection for the ve-hicle. The data transmission must not be limi-ted to perform the functions.● To use the infotainment system, simplylightly press a button or touch the screen.● For the correct operation of the infotain-ment system it is important that it is switchedon and that, if necessary, the time and dateof the vehicle are set correctly.

● If a function button is missing on the screen,it is not a device defect, but corresponds tothe specific equipment of the country or ver-sion.● Some infotainment functions can only beselected when the vehicle is at a standstill. Insome countries, the selector lever must alsobe in the parking position P or in neutral posi-tion N. It is not a malfunction, but is due tocompliance with legal provisions.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contact thelocal authorities.● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turnon the ignition before restarting the infotain-ment system.● If the setup is changed, this may changethe display on the screen and in some cases,the infotainment system may behave in amanner different to that described in this in-struction manual.● Ensure that any repairs or modificationsthat need to be carried out on the infotain-ment system are carried out by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve-hicle may cause noise in the speakers.● In some countries, the infotainment systemautomatically shuts off when the engine is

switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt batterycharge level is low.● On vehicles with park assist, the audiosource volume is automatically lowered whenreverse gear is selected. The volume reduc-tion can be adjusted.● Information about the included softwareand the license conditions can be found inSettings > Copyright.● When selling or lending the vehicle, makesure that all saved data, files and settingshave been deleted and, if necessary, externalaudio sources and data media have been re-moved.

NoteYou will find more information and tips forusing the infotainment system in the Helpmenu.

HOME screen

In the control and display unit you can con-figure the layout of the icons, views and rep-resentation on the home screen or use thefactory format templates.

If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not adevice defect, but corresponds to the specificequipment of the country or version.

The following menus can be included as anicon on the home screen:

158

Introduction

Main menus on the home screen

Navigation ››› page 185

Entertainment ››› page 178

Telephone ››› page 192

Full Link ››› page 169

System Settings ››› page 160

Vehicle settings ››› page 87

Vehicle info ››› page 86

Air conditioning ››› page 144

Sound

Help

Managing the infotainment system

Execute the functions and settings with the in-fotainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotain-ment system has different controls:● Touch screen.● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam-ple, Volume (+ -).● Function buttons, for example, RADIO orMEDIA.

Opening the Quick GuideYou will find more information and tips forhandling in the Quick Guide of the infotain-ment system.

● Press HOME > .

Connecting and disconnecting the info-tainment systemThe infotainment system turns on when theignition is switched on, unless it has beenmanually turned off beforehand.

The infotainment system starts-up with thelast set volume, provided that this does notexceed the preset maximum start-up volume.

The infotainment system automatically turnsoff when the driver's door is opened, providedthe ignition has been switched off before-hand.

Browsing lists and changing titlesSelect a desired function, setting or title fromthe infotainment system via the touch screenor the menu button.

Moving objects and adjusting volumeMove objects on the screen to adapt settings,for example, with scrollable buttons or tomove the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, customise me-nus and views.

Increasing and reducing images or mapsizesTip: use your thumb and index finger.● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and leave them on the screen.● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-ger from the other. To reduce views, slowlybring one finger towards the other.

Note● If you turn on the infotainment systemmanually with the ignition off, it will auto-matically turn off after about 30 minutes.

Customising the infotainment sys-tem

Customise the menus and infotainment viewsto quickly access your favourite or most fre-quently used functions.

In the HOME menu there are function buttonsto access other menus and functions. Adjustthe positions of the function buttons.

Through the drop-down menu you can quick-ly access certain functions. Adapt the func-tions shown.

Configure customised menus and the func-tions shown to adapt the infotainment systemto your needs. »

159

Infotainment System

● See more tips and information on customi-sation by clicking on HOME > > > Adap-tation.

Adapt the HOME menu● Press on a menu and keep your finger onthe screen until the menu is visibly highligh-ted.● Remove your finger from the screen whenyou reach the desired position.

Configuring customised menusIn the HOME menu of the infotainment systemyou will find customised menus in the differ-ent views. Remove or add menus through theconfiguration.

● Press a function button in a customisedmenu and keep your finger on the screen untilan additional window is displayed.● Press > to open the configuration.● To add a new menu, press the template youhave chosen. New customised menus arecreated without functions.● Press to delete a menu.● Press to close the configuration.● Add functions to a new menu.● To return to the customised menu, tap on anempty surface of the screen.

Adapting customised menus● Press a function button in a customisedmenu and keep your finger on the screen untilan additional window is displayed.● Press the function button to which you wantto add a function.● Click on the desired function in the addi-tional window. Depending on the size of thefunction button, you will have different func-tions.● To return to the customised menu, tap on anempty surface of the screen.

Adapting the drop-down menu● Press a function and keep your finger onthe screen until an additional window is dis-played.● Press the desired function in the additionalwindow and keep your finger on the screenuntil the function is visibly highlighted.● Remove your finger from the screen whenyou the function is in the desired position. Theactive function is automatically removedfrom the drop-down menu and added to theadditional window.

Note● At least two customised menus are al-ways available. These cannot be deleted.

● You can add a maximum of two more cus-tomised menus (in total, a maximum of fourcustomised menus).● For some function buttons, more func-tions are available than those seen at firstsight in the additional window. To find allthe functions, in the additional windowslide the screen to the left or right.● For the drop-down menu, more functionsare available than those seen at first sightin the additional window. To find all thefunctions, in the additional window slidethe screen to the left or right.

Settings (system and sound)

The selection of possible settings varies de-pending on the country, the equipment inquestion and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settingsThe meaning of the following symbols arevalid for all system and sound settings.

All changes are automatically applied whenthe menus are closed.

Symbol and its meaning

The setting is selected and activated orconnected.

160

Introduction

Symbol and its meaning

The setting is not selected, disabled ordisconnected.

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To increase a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with thescrollable button without adjusting.

Sound settingsAccess the sound settings: HOME >

In the sound settings there may be the follow-ing functions, information and setting options:

● Equaliser● Position.● Volume.● Settings.

System settingsAccess the system settings: HOME > .

In the system settings there may be the fol-lowing functions, information and setting op-tions:

● Screen.● Time and date.● Language.● Additional keypad languages.● Units.● Voice control.● Wi-Fi.● Applications and services● Manage mobile devices.● Reset factory settings.● System information.● Copyright.● Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sour-cesIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thevolume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio sourceis very low, increase the output volume onthe external audio source. If this is notenough, change the input volume to medi-um or high.

If the sound from the connected external au-dio source is too loud or distorted, lower theoutput volume on the external audio source.If this is not enough, change the input vol-ume to medium or low.

Clean the screen

Remove persistent dirt carefully and withoutusing aggressive cleaning products. To cleanthe screen we recommend that:

● The infotainment system is switched off.● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa-ter ››› page 320.● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt bymoistening with a little water. Then carefullyremove with a clean, soft cloth.

CAUTIONCleaning the screen with inappropriatecleaning products or when dry, may dam-age it.● When cleaning, only press lightly.● Do not use aggressive cleaning productsor that contain solvents. Such productsmay damage the equipment and “darken”the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copy-rights

Registered trademarks and licensesCertain terms in this manual bear the symbol® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is atrademark or a registered trademark. The ab-sence of this symbol, however, does not »

161

Infotainment System

necessarily mean that the term in questioncan be used freely.

Other product names are registered trade-marks or trademarks of the respective rightsholders.

● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of AppleInc.● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® andiPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.● MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-tium LLC.● SD® and SDHC® are trademarks or regis-tered trademarks of SD-3C LLC in the USA.and other countries.● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technologyand patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.

● This product is protected by certain Micro-soft Corporation industrial and intellectualproperty rights. The use or commercializationof technology of this type outside the config-uration of this product, without a licence fromMicrosoft or an authorised Microsoft branchis prohibited.

CopyrightAs a general rule, audio and video files storedon data media and audio sources are subjectto intellectual property protection in accord-ance with the national and international pro-visions applicable in each case. Please bearin mind all legal provisions!

Technical data

Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")1)

The factory-mounted radio in the vehicle withintegrated hardware includes country-specif-ic components and software for connectivityand for the execution of vehicle, comfort andinfotainment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown onthe radio screen and partly on the instrumentpanel.

■ Capacitive colour screen:■ 8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480

pixels.■ Touch operation via the device screen, ro-

tary push-button, menu button and buttonson the multifunction steering wheel.

Central computer with control and displayunit (10")2)

The factory-mounted central computer in thevehicle includes country-specific compo-nents and software for connectivity and forthe execution of vehicle, comfort and infotain-ment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown onthe control and display unit screen and partlyon the instrument panel.■ Capacitive colour screen:■ Using the equipment with:■ Touch zones Touch operation.■ Buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel.■ Approach sensors (driver and passenger

side recognition, gesture control).

Vehicle and comfort functions■ Driver assistance system settings.

1) Equipment name: Media System2) Equipment name: Connect System.

162

Introduction

■ Heating and air conditioning settings.■ Lights and visibility function settings.■ Vehicle comfort settings.■ Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system

Basic equipment:The infotainment system that is supplied fromthe factory is equipped as follows:■ Speakers in different locations and with dif-

ferent power levels (watts).■ Internal amplifier depending on the system:■ 4 speakers: 2 x 20 W■ 7 speakers: 5 x 20 W

■ Setting options:■ Equaliser, depending on the system:■ 4 speakers: treble, mid and bass.■ 7 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-

defined settings.■ Sound distribution, depending on the sys-

tem:■ 4 speakers: Balance (left / right)■ 7 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear).■ Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the

7-speaker system):■ Manual (Driver and All)

■ Automatic depending on the seats oc-cupied.

Optional sound systemThe infotainment system can be extendedwith an optional sound system as follows:■ 10 speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts).■ External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which

processes the audio signals sent by thecentral computer.

■ Excitation of speaker channels throughclass AB final stages.

■ Audio signal processing in digital internalsignal processor (DSP).

■ Independent subwoofer in the luggagecompartment.

■ Setting options:■ User equaliser: 5 bands.■ Equaliser settings predefined by BEATS®

(Signature, Active, Immersive and Voice).■ Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear).■ Sound optimisation by zones:■ Manual (Driver, Front and All)■ Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.■ Subwoofer volume.■ Surround settings.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi■ Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n.■ Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.■ Three Wi-Fi modes at the same time:■ Tethering (2.4 GHz).■ 2.4 GHz access point.

■ Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fidevices.

■ Internet connection via Wi-Fi:■ Tethering through the customer's phone.■ Customer access point (clients) in the ve-

hicle.■ Apple CarPlay via Wi-Fi.■ Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR

code.

Bluetooth® profilesThere can be a maximum of two mobile devi-ces connected to the Bluetooth® hands-freeand a third device connected to the Blue-tooth® as a music player.

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-ephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): theHFP can be used to manage calls through theinfotainment system. »

163

Infotainment System

● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allowsaudio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Itmay require connecting other profiles formanaging and controlling playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allowsphone book contents to be downloaded fromthe mobile telephone.● Message profile (MAP): It allows shortmessages (SMS) to be downloaded andsynchronised.

164

Data transfer

Data transfer

SEAT CONNECT

Introduction

To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa-ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECTcontract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to atemporary use limitation depending on thecountry.

Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfoliosoffered by SEAT and individual services canbe modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-vated, renamed and extended, even withoutprior notification.

In https://my.seat you can create the useraccount, see the description of services andmore information.

The execution and availability of the SEATCONNECT services and service portfoliosmay vary depending on the country, as wellas the vehicle and its equipment.

SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or searchtechnology does not recognise or offer re-sults for all words.

There are SEAT CONNECT services for whichregistration is mandatory and others forwhich it is not mandatory.

Description of servicesBefore running SEAT CONNECT services,read and take into account the description ofthe corresponding services. Descriptions areupdated non-periodically and are availableonline at https://my.seat.

● Always use the most up-to-date version ofthe corresponding service description.

WARNINGIn areas with insufficient mobile phone andGPS signal coverage, neither emergencycalls nor phone calls can be made, and da-ta cannot be transmitted. Where possible,change location.

CAUTIONThe vehicle may be damaged by factorsoutside the control of SEAT, S.A. These maybe specifically:● Misuse of mobile terminals● Data loss during transmission● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-cations● Malicious software on data storage devi-ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones

Services portfolio

The initial service allocation shown here cor-responds to the third generation of SEATCONNECT services and represents the maxi-mum services portfolio. The maximum possi-ble portfolio is only available on some vehiclemodels. During the useful life of the vehicle,you can change the assignment shown here.

After activating the services management inthe infotainment system you can check if thevehicle has services and what they are.

In some countries and in the event of a con-tract renewal, the services offered may becombined differently than indicated here.They may also vary depending on the year ofproduction of the vehicle. The services men-tioned correspond to the third generation ofSEAT CONNECT.

SEAT CONNECT services and functionsthat do not require activationThe following services also work without theactivation of SEAT CONNECT:

● Emergency call service.

SEAT CONNECT servicesThe SEAT CONNECT services are:● Private emergency call● Public emergency call● Roadside assistance call »

165

Infotainment System

● Customer support● Service appointment planning● Online system update● Customisation● Activating SEAT CONNECT● Private mode (deactivation of services)● Delete user / Reset factory settings● Remote independent heating● Remote opening● Horn and turn signals● Vehicle status● Doors and lights● Vehicle status incl. doors and lights● Driving data● Vehicle status report● Anti-theft alarm warning● Zone warning● Speed warning● Online map update● Search for points of interest● Petrol stations● Online traffic information● Parking lots● Online infotainment system update● Online route calculation● Predictive navigation

● Multi-modal route● Information on risks● Dictation● Natural voice control for infotainment, me-dia and radio apps● Natural voice control for destinations andaddresses● Online radio● Online media

SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-clesAvailable only in electric and hybrid vehicles.Not available in vehicles with Radio Composi-tion (8.25” and 6.5").

● Remote air conditioning● Electrical power manager● Departure times● plus all SEAT CONNECT services in the pre-vious section ››› page 165.

SEAT CONNECT individual options● In-Car Applications. These applicationscan be purchased and installed directly inthe infotainment system through the In-Carstore.● Full Link.

● Data package. Pay per use data rates forthe use of online functions, for example, 2 GBper month.

Note● The Emergency Call Service is availableregardless of the login in the infotainmentsystem.● Customisation and purchase of In-Carapplications require loggint into infotain-ment system, but the activation of the vehi-cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec-essary.

Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S-PIN

Activating SEAT CONNECTThe following steps are necessary for the ac-tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis-tration):

● Create a user account at https://my.seat ordirectly through the infotainment system inthe User Management menu.● Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti-vate it.● Add the vehicle to your user account.● Prove ownership.

166

Data transfer

● Prove your identity. It is only necessary ifyou are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele-vant to security.● You can activate it at https://my.seat or di-rectly through the infotainment system. Toactivate it through the infotainment system,proceed as follows:

HOME > User management > Becomea main user.

MENU > User management > Becomea main user.

Follow the rest of the indications and the in-formation shown in the infotainment system.During activation, you may be asked to cre-ate an S-PIN.

Update option

10” Infotainment yes

8.25” Infotainment yes

SEAT CONNECT portal yes

SEAT CONNECT application yes

More information at https://my.seat/faqs.

S-PINThe S-PIN is a sequence of several digits,which can be selected when completed theSEAT CONNECT registration.

10"

8.25"

When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and known datesof birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEATCONNECT user account in “Account set-tings”.

The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro-tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON-NECT service relevant to the security of yourvehicle.

You must manage this S-PIN with absoluteconfidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to thirdparties, for security reasons you must changeit immediately.

Ownership and identity accredita-tion

Become main user (ownership accredita-tion). 2-Key method.To become a main user and thus prove own-ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve-hicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-tion takes place in the vehicle during registra-tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECTuser account, you must log in through the in-fotainment system and then go to User man-agement.

● Switch on the ignition and the infotainmentsystem.

● In the infotainment system, register in SEATCONNECT.● Or: open the menu User management >Settings > Become main user and follow theinstructions.● Press the unlock button on the first vehiclekey.● Press the unlock button on the second vehi-cle key.

Once the infotainment system has processedthe orders by radiofrequency, the accredita-tion of the ownership will have been comple-ted. You can control the current status in theSEAT CONNECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

10” Infotainment 2-Key method.

8.25” Infotainment 2-Key method.

SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible

SEAT CONNECT appli-cation

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)Identity accreditation must be done beforeyou can use SEAT CONNECT services thatare relevant to security, such as the “RemoteOpening” service. Identity accreditation canbe done in two ways:

● In person at the SEAT dealership. »167

Infotainment System

● You can find more information about SEATIdent on the SEAT CONNECT portal athttps://my.seat.

Legal provisions

During the use of SEAT CONNECT services,information is transferred and processed on-line through the vehicle. Such data can alsoprovide (at least indirectly) information aboutthe driver in question, for example, driving be-haviour and location. As a contracting partyin the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT,S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicleis used by other drivers (for example, family orfriends), data protection and personal rightsare respected. Therefore, you must informdrivers in advance that the vehicle transfersand receives data online, and that you canaccess such data.

Not taking into account this obligation to in-form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-pants.

Follow-up services: ask all occupantsThe follow-up services need geographicaland vehicle data to determine whether thevehicle is being used within defined speedranges, where it has been parked or if it is be-ing used in an established geographical area.This information is displayed on the SEAT

CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECTapp.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi-cle occupants if they agree with the activa-ted services. If they do not, deactivate theservice in question (if possible) or do not al-low the occupants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: markingIf the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-trol unit that transmits the its current geo-graphical position and speed, the vehicleusually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roofconsole). The absence of the marking on thevehicle does not guarantee that the controlunit does not transmit the vehicle’s currentgeographical position and speed.

Personal informationSEAT protects your personal data and onlyuses them, as long as the law allows it or youhave given your consent on the occasion of ause. You will find detailed information on dataprocessing in relation to SEAT CONNECTservices in the Privacy Policy, which you canaccess in its corresponding current versionon the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicleIf another person has left you the vehicle forpermanent use (for example, if you buy aused vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already

be activated and the previous user still hasthe possibility of accessing the data regis-tered through SEAT CONNECT and controlcertain functions of your vehicle.

In the infotainment system you can check ifyour vehicle is assigned to a person as themain user. In this case, you can register your-self as the main user of the vehicle and thusautomatically delete the previous main user.Alternatively, through the infotainment sys-tem you can directly and permanently deletethe previous user as the main user, as well asput the vehicle in offline mode and thus limitboth the communication of your vehicle withthe SEAT, S.A. data server and the processingof personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv-ices

The following functions are available in theinfotainment system to deactivate and acti-vate SEAT CONNECT services:

● Central deactivation or activation● Individual deactivation or activation

You can rerun the corresponding services af-ter cancelling their deactivation in the info-tainment system.

168

Data transfer

NoteThe services required by law and their datatransmission cannot be disconnected ordeactivated, for example, the emergencycall system (eCall).

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEATCONNECT services are met, there may befactors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. thatinterfere with the execution of such servicesor prevent them. These may be specifically:

● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, softwareupdate and technical expansion of telecom-munication equipment, satellites, servers anddata banks.● Change of the mobile telephony standardfor the transmission of mobile data by the tel-ecommunications service provider, for exam-ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.● Disconnection of an existing mobile phonestandard by the telecommunications serviceprovider.● Interference, disturbance or interruption inthe reception of the mobile phone and GPSsignal due to aspects such as high-speeddriving, solar storms, meteorological influen-ces, topography, blocking equipment and theintensive use of mobile phones in the radiocells in question.

● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-ple, in tunnels, confined areas between verytall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-tains and valleys.● External information from third party sup-plies available with limitations, incomplete orincorrect, e.g. representations of maps.● Countries and regions where SEAT CON-NECT is not offered.

Service management

Open the settings in users and go to Privacyand Services. You can do the following in theinfotainment system:

● Check which SEAT CONNECT services arecurrently available in the vehicle.● The number of SEAT CONNECT servicesthat are enabled or disabled.● Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECTservices.

More information at https://my.seat.

Privacy and Services SettingsSEAT CONNECT services can be activatedand deactivated individually. To do this, openthe drop-down menu in the service and se-lect activate or deactivate.

Activate: to activate one or more services.

Deactivate: to deactivate one or more services.

Setting options are not available in all markets or inall vehicle models.

NoteIf you deactivate each and every SEATCONNECT service, the OCU may continueto transmit data.

Full Link

Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and use thecontents and functions that are shown on themobile phone device on the infotainmentscreen.

To do this, the mobile phone device must beconnected with the infotainment systemthrough a USB interface.

Some technologies can also be used byWireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in-terface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa-ble:● Apple CarPlay™● Apple CarPlay™ Wireless »

169

Infotainment System

● Android Auto™● MirrorLink®

The availability of the technologies that FullLink includes depends on the country and themobile phone device used.

You will find more information on the SEATwebsite (www.seat.com).

Access the Full Link main menuBrowsing the Full Link main menu depends onthe infotainment system used.

● View : click on Full link● View : click on Menu > Full Link● OR: press APP.

Configure Wireless Full LinkIn order to use Wireless Full Link, you must firstpair the mobile phone device with the info-tainment system. To do this, proceed as fol-lows:

Connect a mobile phone device for the firsttime.● Unlock the mobile phone device.● Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® onthe mobile phone device.● Connect the mobile phone device to the in-fotainment system using a USB cable or viaBluetooth®.

● Access the Full Link main menu, unless itappears automatically.● Select the mobile phone device and thetechnology you want.● Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo-bile phone device to grant the necessary au-thorisations to the infotainment system.● Disconnect the USB connection and con-nect with the infotainment system again viaWi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is nowconfigured.

The pairing has concluded. The connectedmobile phone device can also use WirelessFull Link from now on without the USB con-nection.

If pop-up menus are rejected during the con-nection process, Wireless Full Link will not beavailable. In this case, SEAT recommends re-moving the devices in both the iPhone set-tings and the infotainment system, and re-starting the connection process.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Anydistraction affecting the driver in any waycan lead to an accident and cause injuries.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● Protect the mobile phone device and itsapplications from inappropriate use.● Never carry out modifications to the ap-plications.● Follow instructions in the instructionmanual for the mobile phone device.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damagecaused to the vehicle as a result of the useof applications that are of poor quality orare defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of dataduring transmission or the improper use ofmobile phone devices.

NoteWireless Full Link may not be compatiblewith all technologies.

Applications (apps)

With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con-tents of SEAT applications and other provid-ers installed on mobile phone devices can betransferred to the infotainment screen.

170

Data transfer

In the case of third-party applications, theremay be compatibility problems.

Applications, their use and the necessarymobile phone connection may be pay peruse.

The offer of applications can be varied anddesigned for a vehicle or a specific country.The content and volume of applications, aswell as the companies that offer them, mayvary. Some applications also depend on theavailability of third-party services.

It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-tions offered will work on all mobile phonedevices or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by SEAT can bemodified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivatedand extended without prior notification.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings

To show more informationTo open the Full Link settings menu

Apple CarPlay™

In order to use Apple CarPlay, the followingrequirements must be met:● The iPhone™ must be compatible with Ap-ple CarPlay™.● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on theiPhone™.● Apple CarPlay™ must be active withoutlimitations in the iPhone™ settings.● The iPhone ™ must be connected to the in-fotainment system via a USB connection. On-ly USB connections with data transmissionare suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.● The USB cable used must be an originalApple™ cable.

Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® andWi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect an iPhone™, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the iPhone ™.

The requirements must be met to use AppleCarPlay™.

Launch Apple CarPlay™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.

● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con-nection with the iPhone™.

Disconnecting● On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press theSEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

The representation of function buttons on thescreen may vary.

Special characteristicsDuring an active Apple CarPlay™ connection,the following characteristics are applicable:● Bluetooth® connections between theiPhone™ and the infotainment system are notpossible.● If there is an active Bluetooth® connection,it is automatically interrupted.● The phone functions are only availablethrough Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-scribed for the Infotainment system are notavailable.● The connected iPhone™ cannot be used asa multimedia device in the Media main menu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-tion system at the same time. The last routestarted interrupts the one that was previouslyactive. »

171

Infotainment System

● Depending on the infotainment system youuse, on the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as wellas end an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control (Siri™) of the connectediPhone™.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible iPhones, certi-fied applications and their availability onthe SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car-Play ™ websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

Android Auto™

Requirements for Android Auto™In order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:● The mobile phone device, called smart-phone from here on, has to be compatiblewith Android Auto™.● The smartphone must have an Android Au-to™ application installed.● The smartphone has to be connectedthrough the USB connection with data trans-mission with the infotainment system.● The USB cable used must be an original ca-ble provided by the smartphone manufactur-er.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a smartphone, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the smartphone.

The requirements must be met to use AndroidAuto™.

Launch Android Auto™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press Android Auto™ to establish a connec-tion with the smartphone.

Disconnecting● On the Android Auto™ mode, press the Re-turn to SEAT icon to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristicsDuring an active Android Auto™ connection,the following characteristics are applicable:● An active Android Auto™ device can beconnected at the same time via Bluetooth®(HFP profile) with the infotainment system.● It is possible to use the phone’s functionsthrough Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™device is connected at the same time viaBluetooth® with the infotainment system, thetelephone function of the infotainment canalso be used.● An active Android Auto™ device cannot beused as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Android Auto™ navigationsystem at the same time. The last route star-ted interrupts the one that was previously ac-tive.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.

172

Data transfer

● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as wellas end an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control on the connected smartphone.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible mobile phonedevices, certified applications and theiravailability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)and Android Auto™ websites, or at SEATdealerships.

MirrorLink®

Requirements for MirrorLink®In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re-quirements must be met:● The mobile device must be compatible withMirrorLink™.● The mobile phone device must be connec-ted to the infotainment system via a USB con-nection that is suitable for data transmission.

● The USB cable used must be an original ca-ble provided by the mobile phone devicemanufacturer.● Depending on the mobile tphone deviceused, a Car-Mode application that is suitablefor using MirrorLink® must be installed.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a mobile phone de-vice, follow the instructions on the infotain-ment system screen and on the mobile phonedevice.

The requirements must be met to use Mirror-Link™.

Launch MirrorLink®:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press to establish the connection with themobile phone device.

Disconnecting● In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APP iconto access the Full Link main menu.● OR: press to access the MirrorLink® mainmenu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristicsDuring an active MirrorLink® connection, thefollowing characteristics are applicable:● An active MirrorLink® device can be con-nected to the infotainment system at thesame time via Bluetooth®.● If the MirrorLink® device is connected to theinfotainment system via Bluetooth®, the tele-phone function of the infotainment systemcan be used.● You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de-vice as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as wellas end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttonsFunction buttons and their function:

Return the Full Link main menu. Here youcan end the MirrorLink® connection,connect another mobile phone device orselect another technology.Press to close the open apps. Then pressthe apps to be closed or the Close all »

APP

173

Infotainment System

function button to close all the open ap-plications.Press to display the mobile phone devicescreen on the infotainment systemscreen.To open the MirrorLink® settings.Press to return to the MirrorLink® mainmenu.

NoteYou will find information about technical re-quirements, compatible mobile phone de-vices, certified applications and their avail-ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) andMirrorLink® websites, or at SEAT dealer-ships.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 174, Configuration for sharinga connection over WLAN.

The Infotainment System can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-vide Internet to the devices connected to thehotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 175.

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-erators can provide the relevant informa-tion.● The exchange of data packages maygenerate additional costs, depending onyour mobile phone rate, particularly if youare abroad (for example, roaming rates).

Configuration for sharing a con-nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Pulse the HOME > button.● Activate the wireless network. To do so,press the WLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on thedevice that is to be connected. If necessary,refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-ual.● Activate the mobile device assignment onthe Infotainment System. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and acti-vate the checkbox.● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

● Security level: WPA2 encryption automati-cally generates a network key.● Network key: Network key automaticallygenerated. Press the function button to man-ually change the network key. The networkkey must have a minimum of 8 charactersand a maximum of 63.● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32characters).● Do not send network name (SSID): Acti-vate the checkbox to deactivate the visibilityof the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)3 This depends on the equipment and the coun-try in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN).

174

Data transfer

● Press the WPS button on the WLAN routeruntil the warning light on the router startsflashing. If the WLAN router does not supportWPS the network must be configured man-ually.● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on theWLAN router until the WLAN light on the routerstarts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLANhotspot of an external device to establish aninternet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the HOME > button; OR access theMedia mode and press the Settings menu.● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLANconnection and check the verification box.● Press the Find function button and selectthe device you want from the list.

● If necessary, enter the network key of thedevice in the Infotainment System and con-firm with OK.

Manual settings:● To manually enter the network settings ofan external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

NoteDue to the large number of devices on themarket, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

175

Infotainment System

Infotainment operation

voice control*

Introduction

The voice control works both online* and off-line taking into account what is indicated inpage 176, Languages available depend-ing on the market. In online* mode, com-mands are recorded more accurately, asmore data is available.

Voice control understands questions and ex-pressions without having to learn commands.Commands can be formulated freely andcan be colloquial. You will find proposals forcommands in the infotainment system.

Functions are reduced in offline mode.

Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle cancause malfunctions, as well as confusingphrases and answers.

Languages available depending on themarketOnline* and offline: German, American Eng-lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanishand Czech. These languages have advancedfunctions such as Online Commands, air con-ditioning control, natural interaction, etc.

The other languages of the Infotainment sys-tem do not have Online Commands, air con-ditioning control or natural interaction.

Requirements● Online* and offline: voice control with thecorresponding infotainment mounted on thevehicle.● Online* current SEAT CONNECT Plus con-tract active.

Note● Voice control only recognises commandsin the language that is set in the infotain-ment system.● Test the voice control with the vehiclestopped before starting to move to famili-arise yourself with its operation.

Activation word and commands

Voice control activation wordsIf you have connected the voice control viathe activation word, the connected infotain-ment responds with How can I help you?. Itthen scans the words spoken in the vehicleafter the activation word.

Apart from scanning after the activationword, there is no recording or transmission ofwhat is spoken in the vehicle.

Voice control starts when the infotainmentrecognises the activation word.

Connect and disconnect the activationword● In HOME press Settings > Voice control >Activate/ deactivate activation word.

Activation word: Hola Hola

CommandsFor voice control to recognise commands re-liably, bear in mind the tips for the commandsto work properly.

Tips for the commands to work correctly:● Pronounce clearly. Confusing commandsare not recognised. Talk in a normal tone ofvoice. Speak a little louder if you are drivingat high speed.● Avoid outside noises. Open windows anddoors can interfere with voice control.● Avoid other secondary noises, such as con-versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the airflow from the outlets towards the microphoneor the interior lining of the roof.● Do not use a very strong accent or dialec-tal.● Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises thewords pronounced.

176


Note● When the activation word is disconnec-ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac-tivated by means of the activation word.Voice control is still available via the button on the multifunction steering wheel.● Availability depends on country andequipment.● Depending on the content of the phonebook and to ensure reliable recognition ofthe names of the phone book, it may beuseful to change the order of the first andlast name of the contact in question.

Start and stop voice control

Depending on the equipment, you can startvoice control in different ways.

Start voice control● Voice control activation: say the word thatactivates voice control.● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button .

The voice control ends automatically, if youuse infotainment functions, if the parking sys-tem is activated or by incoming calls.

In some cases you can also start voice con-trol of the connected mobile phone device,by pressing and holding the voice controlbutton.

Manually ending voice controlVoice control can be cancelled with the Can-cel command.

● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button twice in a row, or along press.

177

Infotainment System

Entertainment

Radio mode

Fig. 140 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the availableradio stations in different frequency bandsand memorise your favourites on the presetbuttons to access them quickly.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry. In certain countries, frequencybands may stop broadcasting or not beavailable again.

Access the RADIO menu● Press HOME > > ››› Fig. 140.

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Online* functions in Radio modeOnline* functions in Radio mode are onlyavailable under the following conditions:

● SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plusequipment.● You have an active SEAT CONNECT useraccount.● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-count.

● You have a corresponding data packageacquired from the In-Car store or have a datavolume for your own mobile phone device viaWi-Fi access point.

Note● For streaming services you need to havean account with the provider in question.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.Additional electrical equipment connectedto the vehicle can cause interference in thereception of the radio signal and noise inthe speakers.

178


● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.

Radio equipment and symbols

The functions, as well as the types of recep-tion and frequency bands available dependon the equipment and the country.

● AM* tuner.● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).● Summarised FM station list.● Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into one list.● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta-tions.● Station logos.● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images thatare emitted sequentially.● Online* radio.

Universal symbols in Radio modeTo select the desired AM frequencyband.

To select the desired FM/DAB fre-quency band.

To select the type of Online*radio reception.

AM

FM/DAB

Online radio*

Next to the name of the station, monitor-ing of active traffic information stations(TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency bandTo display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the FM frequency. Onlypossible when the summary station list isdisconnected.DAB not available.DAB stations support presentations (sli-deshow).

Symbols on the AM frequency bandManually updating the station list.To display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Online* radio modeShow station selection.Open text search.Show the last online radio stationsheard.Show the 100 most heard online radiostations.Show available online radio podcasts.Show online radio stations, which origi-nate from the desired country.Show online radio stations, which broad-cast in the desired language.

TP

Show online radio stations whose pro-gramme belongs to the desired musicalgenre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a sta-tion

Select the frequency bandBefore selecting a station you have to selecta frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-ferent stations are available depending onthe frequency band selected or the type ofreception.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry.

● Select the frequency band or type of re-ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (for devices thatdo not have DAB), Online* radio.

Search and select a stationYou can select radio stations in differentways. The options vary depending on the fre-quency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM andFM)● Activate the frequency band. »

179

Infotainment System

● Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre-quency band and release it when you reachthe frequency band you want.● OR: press on a point on the frequencyband. The cursor will automatically jump tothe corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Select from the station list (AM andFM/DAB)The station list shows the stations that arecurrently tunable. In the AM frequency band,you may have to update the station list if youare no longer in the area where you last ac-cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-quency band, the station list is automaticallyupdated.

● Open the station list● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned. In the case ofFM/DAB and if the station is available, thebest quality reception is automatically selec-ted.

Search and filter stations (Online* radio)In Online Radio mode, stations can be filteredby categories and can be searched by text.

● Open the station list.

● Select the category by which the stationsare to be filtered.● OR: press to start the text search. The in-put field is displayed.● Enter the name of the station you want. Thelist of the stations found is updated while en-tering the text.● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)In SCAN mode the stations are automaticallytuned in a sequential manner and each ofthem is played for approx. 5 seconds.

● To start the SCAN mode press SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the station currentlytuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is aSCAN function button.

● To select a station press SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttonsYou can store up to 36 stations of differentfrequency bands and reception types as fa-vourites using the preset buttons.

● Tune the station you want.● Access the preset buttons.

● Press the preset button and keep it presseduntil the station is stored.● OR: press the station on the station list andkeep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-played.● Press the preset button.

The station is stored in the selected presetbutton.

If a station was already stored in the presetbutton, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

TP (Traffic information)The TP function monitors the announcementsof a station with traffic information and auto-matically reproduces them in the Radio modeor in the multimedia playback that is active.To do this, you have to be able to tune into astation with traffic information.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic information from other stations(EON).

In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-dia mode, a station with traffic information inthe background is automatically tuned whileit is possible to tune into a station with trafficinformation.

180


If no station with traffic information can betuned in, the device automatically searchesfor stations with tunable traffic information.

Stations with traffic information are not avail-able in all countries.

Activating and deactivating the TP func-tion● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, pressSettings > Traffic station (TP).

Online* radioOnline radio is a type of reception for Internetradio stations and podcasts that are inde-pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-net transmission, reception is not limited tothe region.

Online radio is only available through the In-ternet connection of the active infotainmentsystem. The use of online radio can generateexpenses due to the transmission of datafrom the Internet.

● In Online radio mode, press and set the au-dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra-dio.

Station logosIn the case of some frequency bands, stationlogos may already be pre-installed in the in-fotainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings theautomatic selection of station logos is ac-

tivated, station logos are automatically as-signed to the stations.

In the Online radio mode, the infotainmentsystem accesses the station logos of the on-line database and automatically assignsthem to the stations

Assign station logos manually● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.● Press on the icon and then select thestation to which a station logo is to be as-signed.● Select the station logo. If desired, repeatthe same process with other stations.● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.

181

Infotainment System

Media Mode

Fig. 141 Schematic representation: Multimediaview

In Media mode you can play multimedia filesfrom data media and streaming servicesthrough the infotainment system.

Depending on the equipment, the followingdata media can be used:

● USB storage support (for example, a USBstick, a mobile phone connected vai USB).● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobilephone or a tablet).

Depending on the equipment, the followingtypes of multimedia files can be played:

● Audio files.● Video files.

You can also use streaming services. Theavailability of streaming services depends onthe equipment and the country.

To use streaming services you need to haveyour own user account in the streaming serv-ice in question.

Access the MEDIA menu● Press HOME > > ››› Fig. 140.

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data mediaData media may not work if they have beenexposed to high temperatures or have been

damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-turer’s indications.

Quality differences between data media pro-duced by different manufacturers can causemultimedia playback malfunctions.

Incorrect configuration on a data media maycause the data media to be unreadable.

Playlists only specify a playback order andrefer to the storage location of the multime-dia files within the folder structure. In a play-list there are no multimedia files saved. Toplay a playlist, multimedia files have to befound in the storage places of the data mediato which the playlist refers.

182


Equipment features. Audio, multimediaand connectivity:● Multimedia playback and control via Blue-tooth®.● Audio playback in these formats: AAC,ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10(.wmv, .asf).● Playlists on any type of device.● Multimedia streaming (online*).● Multimedia search.

NoteSEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora-tion or loss of files on data storage devices.

Select and play a multimediasource

Select multimedia sourceBefore playing multimedia files you must firstconnect a multimedia source.

To use streaming services you must be con-nected to the Internet.

● Connect an external multimedia source.

● Select the connected media source to beused for playback.

Playing audio and video filesYou can search and play multimedia filesfrom an available multimedia source in differ-ent ways.

Search in the folder structureMultimedia files can be catalogued by cate-gories (for example, album, artist, title). In MyMultimedia this category view is always dis-played. The classic folder structure of individ-ual USB data media is also found in My Multi-media.

● Activate the folder structure.● The folder structure of the selected multi-media source is displayed. When My multi-media is selected, the categories (music, vid-eos, playlists) and connected multimediasources are displayed first.● Search for the title you want in the folderstructure.● Or: press to start the text search. The in-put field is displayed.● Enter the name of the desired title. The listof the titles found is updated while enteringthe text.● Press the desired title.● If at the beginning of the playback your se-lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,

the multimedia files that are in it are alsoadded to the playback.● If a playlist is played, all available titles inthe playlist are added to the playback.● Close your selection with .

Select favouritesIn favourites you can save titles, music gen-res, artists and albums individually for play-back.

● Access favourites .● Press the favourite you want.

Depending on your selection, all the titles be-longing to the favourite are added to theplayback.

Configure streaming servicesDepending on the equipment you can usestreaming services directly through the info-tainment system. For this you need to have apremium user account of the streaming serv-ice in question and you have to log in with it inthe infotainment system. You also need to beconnected to the Internet.

● Select Streaming as the multimediasource.● A list of available streaming services is dis-played.● Select the streaming service you want. »

183

Infotainment System

● Follow the steps indicated by the Infotain-ment System.● The streaming service is added to the list ofmultimedia sources as a new function button.

Save favouritesOnly multimedia files can be saved as favour-ites if these are saved in My multimedia ofthe infotainment system. You can save titles,albums, artists and music genres individuallyas favourites.

● Start playback.● Access favourites.● Tap a favourite that is not assigned.● Or: click on an existing favourite and pressand hold for approx. 3 seconds.● Select from the selection list: Title, Album,Artist, Musical genres.

● Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previ-ously selected favourite. If the favourite wasalready assigned, the previously saved fa-vourite is overwritten.

The selectable options in the selection listdepend on the data attached to the multime-dia file. If the music genre is not indicated inthe music files, for example, you cannot savethe music genre as favourite.

If a video file is playing, only that video canbe saved as favourite.

Playing entertainment content inthe infotainment system

You can play music and videos in the infotain-ment system.

Video modeWhen in video mode, a video can be playedon the infotainment screen if this is stored ona data media, in My Multimedia or is sourcedfrom a streaming service. In this case, the vid-eo sound is played through the vehicle'sspeakers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle isstopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in-fotainment screen turns off. The sound of thevideo can still be heard.

A stable Internet connection is required forplayback from a streaming service. In thiscase, telephony costs may be generated.

184


Navigation*

Introduction

Fig. 142 Schematic representation: Navigationview

A global satellite system determines the cur-rent position of the vehicle and the sensorsmounted on the vehicle analyse the routestaken. All measured values and possible traf-fic events are compared with the availablemaps to allow optimal navigation to the des-tination.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-resentations will guide you to your destina-tion.

Navigation management is carried out on thescreen.

Depending on the country, some functions ofthe infotainment system will not be available

on the screen when travelling above a certainspeed. It is not a malfunction, but is due tocompliance with legislation.

Navigation announcementsNavigation announcements are acoustic indi-cations for driving referred to the currentroute.

The type and frequency of navigation an-nouncements depend on the driving situation,for example, starting the guide to the destina-tion, driving on the motorway or on a round-about and the settings.

If the exact destination cannot be reachedbecause, for example, it is in a non-digitisedarea, indications relating to the address andthe distance to the destination are displayedon the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re-ceive information about reported traffic con-gestion on the route. An additional navigationannouncement is provided if the route is re-calculated due to traffic congestion.

While a navigation announcement is playing,its volume can be adjusted. The followingnavigation announcements provided will beplayed with the newly adjusted volume. »

185

Infotainment System

Limitations during navigationIf the infotainment system cannot receive da-ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnelor in an underground garage, navigation con-tinues using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitised or are only par-tially digitised on the infotainment memory,the infotainment system will still attempt toprovide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-tion data, it may not be possible to determinethe exact position of the vehicle. This maymean that navigation is not as precise as usu-al.

Roads and streets are subject to constantchange (e.g. new roads, road works, roadsclosed to traffic, changes to street namesand building numbers). If the navigation datais obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur-acies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation mapTo allow an optimal view, you can also man-age the navigation map with additional fingermovements.

Move the map (tip: use your index finger).● Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger).● To increase the view in a certain position,double-click on the map.

Zoom out the view (tip: use your index andmiddle fingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time.

Change view (tip: use your index finger).● Press twice on the map and keep your fin-ger pressed on the screen.● To zoom out the view of the map, move yourfinger upwards. To zoom in the view of themap, move your finger downwards.

Change view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To zoom out the view of the map, move onefinger towards the other. To zoom in the viewof the map, move one finger away from theother.

Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and horizontal to each other, keepthem pressed.● To tilt the view of the map forward, moveyour fingers upwards. To tilt the view of themap backward, move your fingers down-wards.

Rotate view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To rotate the map view, turn your fingersclockwise anticlockwise.

Saved dataThe infotainment system saves certain data,for example, frequent routes and position da-ta, to make the entry of the destination moreagile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data● Press Settings > Basic function settings >Delete and then OK

WARNINGSelect the settings, enter the destinationand the modifications for navigation onlywith the vehicle at a standstill.

Note● If a detour is passed during route guid-ance, navigation may recalculate theroute.● The quality of the navigation recommen-dations given by the Infotainment systemdepends on the navigation data availableand any reported traffic congestions.

186


● Navigation announcements are not emit-ted if the sound is muted in the infotainmentsystem.

Navigation functions and symbols

NavigationNavigation functions depend on the equip-ment and country.

Functions● Entering destination and route calculation(offline and online*).● Indication of two navigation maps at thesame time (screen and instrument panel*).● Update of online* maps.● Predictive navigation.● 3D urban maps.● Online* traffic information● Dynamic POIs (points of interest)

Symbols on the mapThe buttons and indications depend on thesettings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic events and points of inter-est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-esting stopovers, provided navigation hassuch data ››› page 190.

Current positionSearch for destinations.Destinations along the route.Final destinationHome addressWork addressFavourite destinationsAdditional window with more options.Additional window with route options.Centre the map on the current position.Change view: 2D oriented to the north,or 2D oriented to the direction of travel,or 3D to the direction of travel.Information about the current routeguidance.Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window● To open the additional window, press .

Centre the map on the current position.Repeat the last navigation announce-ment.Volume of navigation announcements.Map lighting in Automatic Day/NightmodeOffer new guidance routes.

|

Other symbolsEntering the detailed destination for anaddress.Search for destinations.Suggested destinations.Last destinations.Favourite destinationsBack

Symbols in the route detailsCurrent position.Destination of the current guidance.Close the route details.

POI symbols (points of interest)POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data.

Click on the desired POI (point of interest) tostart a route guidance ››› page 188.

Petrol station.Parking lot.Tourist information offices.Train station.Restaurant. »

|

187

Infotainment System

Traffic information.POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data››› page 190.

Click on a traffic event to open an additionalwindow with further details ››› page 190.

Slow traffic.Traffic jam.Accident.Slippery surface (ice or snow).Road closed to traffic.Slippery road hazard.Danger.Road works.Strong wind.

Navigation data

The Infotainment system is equipped with abuilt-in navigation data memory. Dependingon the country, the necessary navigation da-ta may already be pre-installed.

To provide correct route guidance and makethe most of the functions offered, the infotain-ment system should be updated on a regularbasis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur-ing navigation. Current routes cannot be

traced or the route guidances will lead tomistaken destinations.

Ensure navigation data is updated at alltimes.

Online* updating of navigation dataThe navigation data of the regions throughwhich you travel frequently is automaticallyupdated in the background if the Internetconnection is established and the privacysettings are valid.

● With the ignition switched on, the naviga-tion data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation dataCurrent navigation data for large regions, forexample Western Europe, can be downloa-ded from www.seat.com and stored on USBdata devices. Navigation through USB datadevices is not possible.

● Download the navigation data to a USB da-ta device.● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.● Connect the USB data device to the info-tainment system. Navigation data is automat-ically updated in the background.

The map version is displayed in HOME > >System information.

WARNINGIf you update the navigation data manuallywhile driving, it may cause accidents withserious injuries.● Update the navigation data only with thevehicle at a standstill.

NoteAutomatic update of the navigation data issubject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni-to” mode, no update is carried out.

Start route guidance

Depending on the country and equipment,different functions are available to enter des-tinations.

The different functions for entering destina-tions are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu● Press HOME > > .

Select the destination and start naviga-tion● Press and select the desired destination us-ing the upper right menu (personal destina-tions, last destinations or favourites).● OR: press and enter the address in the inputmask .

188


● OR: detailed address.● Press Start.

Quick start of the routeThe destination synopsis uses recorded datato propose possible destinations.

● Select the destination and press and holdthe desired destination for a few seconds.

Select the destination and start naviga-tion● Press .● Select the desired destination. The routeguidance starts automatically.

Last destinationsNavigation saves up to the last ten destina-tions to make them available for a route guid-ance.

Select the destination and start naviga-tion● Press .● Press the desired destination.● Press Start.

Quick start● Press and hold the desired destination for afew seconds.

Favourite destinationsSave up to 20 destinations as favourites.

Save destination as favourite● During a destination entry press on the ad-ditional window .

Select the destination and start naviga-tion● Press and then .● Press the desired destination.● Press Start.

Select on the mapThe navigation map includes active areas atmany points that are suitable for entering thedestination. To do this, press the desired posi-tion or place on the map. If there is map dataat this point, you can start a route guidance.

Whether it is possible to enter the destinationthrough the navigation map depends on thestate of the data and it is not possible for allpositions.

To start “offroad navigation”, press in anempty area without position data.

Start navigation● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigation mapcan be used by means of additional fingermovements ››› page 186.

● Press the desired destination on the map.● Press Route.

Offroad navigation*“Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-lected destination points using unknown da-ta. When a destination point is outside theknown roads or position data, navigationfinds the route to the next point of the knownroad and completes the path to the next des-tination point with a direct connection.

Start navigation● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigation mapcan be used by means of additional fingermovements ››› page 186.● Press on any point on the map without posi-tion data.● Press Route.

Use contact detailsStart route guidance with the saved addressdata of a contact. Contacts saved withoutaddress data cannot be used for route guid-ance.

Start navigation● Press .● Press on the contact you want.● Press Route. »

189

Infotainment System

Note● Enter the destination as accurately aspossible. If you enter a destination incor-rectly, the route guidance will not be ableto start or it will guide you to an incorrectdestination.● If the address details of a contact are ob-solete, the route guidance will neverthelesstake you to the registered address. Checkthat the contact address is updated.

Traffic information

The infotainment system receives detailedtraffic information automatically if the Inter-net connection is established. This informa-tion is shown with symbols and highlightingthe road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidentsTraffic incidents, for example, traffic jams orcongested traffic, are shown on the naviga-tion map using symbols.

With an active route guidance, traffic inci-dents that are on the current route are shownin the route details. Such traffic incidents canbe avoided ››› page 190.

Traffic flow indicationThe navigation map shows traffic flow ac-cording to current traffic events, highlightingthe road network in colour.

● Orange: Slow traffic.● Red: Traffic jam.

NoteTraffic information receipt is subject to theprivacy settings. In maximum Privacymode, no traffic information is received.Tracking or Location level setting is neces-sary.

Function descriptions

Route detailsThe route details contain information on allincidents, for example, the starting point,stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-tion, provided the navigation has such data.

If you press on an incident, an additional win-dow opens providing more options. The avail-able options depend on the incident and thecurrent settings.

Open and close the route details● To open them press on the vertical segmentin the centre of the screen on the right››› Fig. 142 or slide it

● To open them press on the vertical segmentin the centre of the screen on the left or slideit.

Edit route guidanceTo edit the route guidance, move the stop-overs to the destination in the TripView view.

● Hold the desired destination pressed until itis visibly highlighted.● Move the destination to the desired posi-tion.● Remove your finger from the screen. Theroute will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidentsThe details of the route show the current traf-fic incidents if the navigation has such data.Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details››› page 190.

● Press on a traffic event.● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screenWhen handling navigation functions, an addi-tional window with other options may open.Possible options depend on the function be-ing used.

190


Close the additional screen● Press on an empty area outside the addi-tional window.● OR: press .● OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map Show what is selected on themap.

Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid-ance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Delete Delete a stopover from the routeguidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-calculate.

Stopping routeguidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Functions in the additional window:

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage patternWhen the vehicle is in motion, navigationsaves routes and destinations used to auto-matically generate destination proposals.Destinations are learned based on the time ofday and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at thesame time. The proposed routes may be dif-ferent from the routes of the normal routeguidance.

If one of the proposed destinations is selec-ted, the guide to that destination is started.

The route guidance follows the selected routeuntil the vehicle deviates from it. In that case,the route is recalculated and takes you backalong the most direct path to the initially se-lected destination.

Important traffic jams are taken into accountin the route guidance, and are avoided if al-ternative routes are available, provided navi-gation has such data.

You can activate and deactivate the functionwhenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage patternThe setting is in the corresponding navigationmenu > Basic function settings.

● To activate the function, activate Learn us-age pattern.● To disable the function, disable Learn us-age pattern.● To delete saved data, press Delete usagepattern.

191

Infotainment System

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 143 Schematic representation: Phone view

Through the telephone interface you canconnect your mobile phone device suitablefor telephony with the infotainment systemand manage the phone functions through theinfotainment system. The sound is playedthrough the vehicle's speakers.

You can connect up to two mobile phone de-vices simultaneously to the Infotainment sys-tem.

High speeds, poor weather or road conditionsand a noisy ambience (even outside of thevehicle), as well as the quality of receptioncan all affect the quality of a telephone con-versation in the vehicle.

Note● As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex-ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-essary once. You can restore the deviceconnection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with theinfotainment system whenever you wantwithout having to pair the device again.● The availability of some telephony func-tions will depend on the mobile phone con-nected to the Infotainment System.

Telephone interface equipment andsymbols

Equipment features● Hands-free function.● Use up to two phones at the same time.● Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 con-tacts.● SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS reading,SMS writing (templates included), SMS play-back, message history.● Email functions via Bluetooth®: readingemail, writing email.

192


● Connection to wireless charging option.● Connection to the microphone mounted onthe vehicle.

Symbols in the main menuContacts.List of incoming and outgoing calls.Enter telephone number.Text messages (SMS and emails).Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for callsThe symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the fore-ground.End or reject a call.Open contact list.Enter telephone number.Mute the sound of the hands-freeHold call.Continue call.Start conference call.Pass call to private modeSend an emergency call.Get help in case of breakdown.

Obtain information on the SEAT brandand selected additional services relatedto traffic and your travel.Voice mail.

Call list symbols● To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call.Outgoing call.Missed call.Telephone number (company).Telephone number (private).Mobile telephone number (company).Mobile telephone number (private).Fax (private).Fax.

Symbols for text messagesThe symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

● To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input ››› page 176.Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele-phone interface in places with a risk of explo-sion. These places are not always clearlymarked. They include, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-uefied gas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder.● All other places where the vehicle engine ortelephone must be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion!

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, itmust be switched off at all times. The radi-ation produced by the mobile phone whenswitched on may interfere with sensitivetechnical and medical equipment, possiblyresulting in malfunction or damage to theequipment.

193

Infotainment System

Pair, connect and manage

Requirement for pairing:

● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainmentsystem.● Depending on the mobile device, it will benecessary to have the Bluetooth® menu openor activate the Visibility option so that thedevice is visible from the infotainment system.

Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel-ephony with the infotainment system to usethe telephone interface functions. On the firstconnection, the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system. Doing sosaves a user profile ››› page 194.

The pairing can take a few minutes. The func-tions available depend on the mobile phonedevice used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-ces on the mobile phone device and selectthe name of the infotainment system.● Please note and, if necessary, confirm themessages that appear on the mobile phonedevice and on the infotainment system. If thepairing was successful, the phone data issaved in the user profile.

● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connectionTo use the functions of the telephone inter-face, there must be at least one mobilephone device connected to the infotainmentsystem. If there are several mobile phone de-vices connected to the infotainment system,you can switch between active and passiveconnections. To use the telephone interfacewith the desired mobile phone device, estab-lish the active connection with the infotain-ment system.

Difference between connection types

PrimaryThe mobile phone device is paired andconnected. The functions of the tele-phone interface are performed with thedata of said mobile phone device.

Secon-dary

The mobile phone device is paired andconnected. Calls can be managed butthe phone book, messages or otherfunctions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored in theinfotainment system, even if they are not cur-rently connected.

Connect a mobile phone deviceRequirement: the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system.● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.

Establish an active connectionRequirement: several mobile phone devicesare connected to the infotainment system atthe same time.● Select the desired mobile phone devicefrom the drop-down menu. All other mobilephone devices are automatically in the pas-sive connection.

User profilesFor each of the paired mobile phone devicesan individual user profile is automatically cre-ated. In the user profile, data from the mobilephone device is stored, for example, contactdetails or settings. A maximum of four userprofiles can be saved in the infotainment sys-tem at the same time.

WARNINGIf you perform the pairing while driving, itcould cause an accident or injury.● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at astandstill.

194


Note● In the pairing of some mobile phone devi-ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen ofthe mobile phone device. Enter that numberin the infotainment system to complete thepairing.● While the infotainment system is in theKnown mobile phones menu, the wirelesscharging function is disabled. When youexit this menu, the wireless charging func-tion is activated again.

Basic and Comfort Telephony

Depending on the equipment, two types oftelephone interface can be used:

● Basic telephone interface.● Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interfaceThe Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This inter-face allows the use of telephone functionsthrough the infotainment system and play-back through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interfaceLike the Basic telephone interface, the Com-fort telephone interface also uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile.

The Comfort phone interface can be equip-ped with the wireless charging function.

In order to use the functions of the wirelesscharging function, you have to place a suita-ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor-age compartment. The mobile phone devicewill then connect to the vehicle antenna. Thisimproves the reception and sound quality ofcalls.

To call

Open the telephone interface● Press HOME > .

CallSelect a phone number to start a call. To se-lect a phone number you have different func-tions available.

Use contact detailsIf a contact has several registered phonenumbers you have to select one.

● Press on the list to start the call.● Press and enter the contact name in theentry field to search for it. Press on the con-tact to start the call.● Press a favourite in the main menu of thetelephone interface to start the call.

Use a call listThe telephone interface shows the call list ofthe mobile telephone device. Start a call fromthe call list.

● Press > Everyone and in the list press anumber to start the call.● OR: press and filter the call list entries(for example, missed calls or dialled num-bers). In filtered list, press a number to startthe call.

Enter telephone number manually● Press and enter the phone number.● Press to start the call

While entering the phone number, contactsthat match that number are shown on the in-fotainment screen.

Send messages

Send a text messageDepending on the mobile phone device andthe infotainment system used, you can sendand receive SMS and e-mails through the tel-ephone interface.

Send an SMS● Press SMS > New message and enter themessage on the screen. »

195

Infotainment System

● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Send an e-mail● Press E-mail > New message and enterthe message on the screen.● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Phone book, favourites and speeddial buttons

In the first connection of a telephone with theinfotainment system, the phone book is savedin the infotainment system. It may be neces-sary to confirm the data transmission on themobile phone.

Each time the phone is reconnected, thephone book is updated.

If conference calls are supported, the phonebook can be accessed during a call. If thereis a saved image for a contact, it can be dis-played in the list next to the entry.

FavouritesA speed dial button can be assigned to aphone book favourite up to a maximum of six.If there is a registered photo saved to thecontact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

All speed dial buttons have to be manuallyedited and will be assigned to a user profile.

Assign the speed dial button● In the Favourites menu, press the + button,then open the phone book to select a con-tact as a favourite. If the contact has severalphone numbers, press on the number in thelist.

Edit the speed dial button● To edit or delete a favourite contact presson the icon in the Favourites menu screen.You can delete one or more favourites.

Call a favourite● Press the assigned speed dial button.

Note● Favourites are not updated automatical-ly. If you change a contact's phone number,you have to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box*

Fig. 144 In the centre console: pad for the mo-bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func-tions that will help to use your mobile device.These are:

● Wireless charging / “Wireless Charger” (on-ly incorporates the wireless charging func-tionality).● Signal amplifier / “Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

Wireless charging / “Wireless Charger”The Wireless Charger allows mobile deviceswith Qi1) technology to be charged without acable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

196


● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 144››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device uses Qi technol-ogy, check your phone's user manual or visitthe SEAT website.

Signal amplifier / “Mobile Signal Amplifi-er”It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehicleand have better reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended thatyou pair the system and the mobile usingBluetooth® and place it on the ConnectivityBox pad, for the best reception without hav-ing to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle'sexternal aerial:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 144››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically beready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING● The mobile phone may heat up due to thewireless charging. Think about this beforeyou pick it up, and take care when removingit.● There must be no metallic or other ob-jects between the mobile phone and thehousing, to prevent the functionality of theConnectivity Box from being affected.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiinductive charging interface standard forproper operation.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.● No improvement in reception can beguaranteed if there is more than one mo-bile phone on the pad.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-ing.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, it will be charged by themeans specified by the manufacturer.

Multimedia

USB port

Fig. 145 Centre console: USB port.

Fig. 146 Rear part of the centre console: USBconnectors with power outlet function.

The USB port can be found in the storagecompartment area of the front centre con-sole ››› Fig. 145. »

197

Infotainment System

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 146.

198

Start and driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping theengine

Ignition and start button

Fig. 147 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button(Press & Drive). For this there must be a validkey inside the passenger compartment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/offIf you only want to switch on the ignition(without starting the engine), briefly press thestart button once without pressing the brakepedal or the clutch pedal ››› .

The push-button text flasheslike a heartbeat when the system is ready forthe ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnectionWhen the vehicle detects that there is nodriver once the engine has stopped, after acertain time the ignition is switched off auto-matically. If at that time the dipped beamheadlights are on, the side lights will stay onfor approx. 30 minutes. The side lights can beturned off by blocking the vehicle››› page 93, or manually ››› page 111.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is

enough charge in the battery). If the driverlocks the vehicle or manually turns off thelight, the side light goes out.

WARNINGWhen switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-authorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignition andoperate any of the electrical equipment.

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-connect the ignition and, if appropriate,take into account the instructions on thescreen of the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the engine off and the ignition on, thevehicle battery might be discharged and itmight not be possible to start the engine.● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait untilthe warning light ››› page 200 goes offbefore starting the engine. »

199

Driving

● If during the STOP phase you press the button, the ignition is switch-

ed off and the push-button flashes.● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”;the button will flash.

Starting the engine

● Vehicles with manual transmission: put thegear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedaland keep it pressed in this position until theengine starts.● Vehicles with automatic transmission: putthe selector lever in P or N, press the brakepedal and keep it pressed in this position untilthe engine starts.● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 147; do notpress the accelerator. There needs to be avalid key inside the vehicle for the engine tostart. After starting the engine, the lighting ofthe button remains fixed indicat-ing that the engine is running.● Once the engine starts, release the start-upbutton.● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,perform an emergency start ››› page 202.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. During pre-

heating, the warning lamp remains lit. Toavoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine atoperating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp willlight up for about one second. This meansthat you can start the engine almost immedi-ately.

Starting a diesel engine after having runout of fuelIf the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run untilcompletely empty, after refuelling it can lastlonger than normal to start the engine, evenup to a minute. This is because the fuel sys-tem must eliminate air first.

WARNINGDo not keep the engine running in confinedspaces, as there is a risk of poisoning.● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-ness and death.

WARNINGDo not get out of the vehicle with the en-gine running, especially if a gear is engag-

ed. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNINGNever use cold start sprays, they could ex-plode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to restart the engine im-mediately after switching it off.● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine, asthis could cause engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Note● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.

200

Start and driving

● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.● When the outside temperature is below+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Turning off the engine

● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .● With manual transmission, press the clutchall the way down. If the vehicle is automatic,set the selector lever to the P position.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 147.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.

● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.

WARNINGAlways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, theignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.● If the engine has been driven at highspeed for a prolonged period of time, itmay overheat when switched off. To avoiddamage, allow the engine to run for ap-proximately two minutes in neutral beforeswitching it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more if

the coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

In the key there is a chip that automaticallydeactivates the electronic immobiliser.

The electronic immobiliser is automaticallyactivated when the key is outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine SEAT key with its correct code.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

201

Driving

Emergency starting function

Fig. 148 In the centre console: emergencystart.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

● Immediately after pushing the start button,place the key in the drink holder of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 148, as close as possible tothe Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in-strument panel display

Press the clutch● This message appears on vehicles with amanual gearbox if the driver tries to start theengine without having the clutch pedalpressed. The engine will only start if you pressthe clutch pedal.

Press the brake● This message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or P● This message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever of theautomatic gearbox is not in position P or N.The engine can only be started and stoppedin those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle canmove; doors can only close in posi-tion P.● For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox is notin position P after you switch off the ignition.Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-erwise the vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever in thedrive position!● This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P when thedriver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzingsound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Ignition is switched on● This driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

“My Beat” function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle ignitionsystem.

When entering the vehicle, the start button››› Fig. 147 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine startbutton flashes. With the ignition is switchedoff, the start button goes off after a few sec-onds.

With the engine running, the start button lightstays on, indicating that the engine is running.The time elapsed between the moment theuser starts the engine with the start buttonbutton and the lighting changes from flashingto fixed will depend on specific engine size

202

Start and driving

characteristics. When the start button is usedto stop the engine, the button starts flashingagain.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the start button buttonstays on, as the Start-Stop system remainsactive even though the engine is off.● When the engine cannot be started againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 203, andneeds to be started manually, the start but-ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has beendisconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated. Startthe engine manually● This indication for the driver shows that theStart-Stop system cannot start the engineagain.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available● There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.Take the vehicle to a workshop to have thefault repaired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fueland reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping. The ignition remains switched on.The engine automatically switches back onwhen required.

In this scenario, the light of the button remains lit.

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

More information on the Start-Stop systemcan be found in the Infotainment system:press the function button > Vehicle info >Vehicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, putit into neutral and release the clutch pedal.The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stoppedbefore stopping completely (approximately 7km/h).● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lamp willswitch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox● Brake until the vehicle has come to a stand-still, and keep your foot on the brake pedal oractivate the Auto Hold system so that the ve-hicle remains braked. The engine will switchoff. The warning lamp will appear in thedisplay. The engine can be stopped before »

203

Driving

stopping completely (approximately 7 or 2km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).1)

● When you take your foot off the brake ped-al the engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off. With the Auto Hold sys-tem, the engine will not start if you removeyour foot from the brake pedal. The car startswhen you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine has reached operating temper-ature.● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The engine does not turn off for variousreasonsBefore stopping the vehicle, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the re-quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.● The temperature selected on the climatecontrol has not been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 144.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifthtime, the engine will not stop any more.● With ESC disabled.● After emergency braking or loss of adhe-sion.● With a trailer attached.● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifthtime, the vehicle will not stop any more.● When the battery charge level is low.● While the particle filter is regenerating (die-sel engines).

is shown on the instrument panel display,as well as on the driver information system*.

The engine starts by itselfWhen stopped, the normal system mode maybe interrupted in the following situations. Theengine restarts by itself without involvementfrom the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thetemperature selected on the climate control.● Defrost function button activated››› page 144.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.● The vehicle rolls forward or backward withthe engine off.● ESC deactivated.● The accelerator pedal (automatic trans-mission), or the clutch (manual transmission)is pressed.● The steering wheel is turned slightly (exceptmHEV version).● When the air conditioning is activated.

1) In the mHEV version (semi-hybrid) from 20km/h.

204

Start and driving

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S in addition to whenin Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,the engine will also remain switched off whenyou take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-der to start the engine up again the accelera-tor must be pressed, or another gear engag-ed or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the enginefrom accidentally starting when passingthrough R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The operation of the brakeand steering will not be fully guaranteed.More force will be needed to turn the steer-ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer anaccident and even serious injuries.

● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when workingin the engine compartment ››› page 205.

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 218.

Note● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,you can control whether the engine shouldswitch off or not by reducing or increasingthe brake force applied. While the vehicleremains stopped, the engine will not stop ifthe brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trafficjams with frequent stopping and startingfor example. As soon as strong pressure isapplied to the brake pedal, the engine willstop.● When stopped, the brake pedal must bekept pressed to ensure that the vehicledoes not move.● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-box, it can be directly started up again byimmediately pressing the clutch pedal.● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever isplaced in position D, N or S after engagingreverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwardsdirection must be reached for the system tobe in a status to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon-necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 149 On the Infotainment system screen.:Start-Stop system connected. View in themain menu. View with the Infotainment sys-tem off.

If you do not want to use the system, you candisconnect it manually through the Infotain-ment system:

● Select > Driver assistance.

When the symbol appears orange››› Fig. 149 the system is activated and willstop and start. When the symbol appearsin white the system is disconnected. »

205

Driving

NoteThe system switches on every time the en-gine is turned off voluntarily.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 150 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 150.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gearEngage reverse gear only when the vehicle isstopped.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it willgo and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 150 R .● Release the clutch.

Changing down gearsWhile driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This also happensif the electronic parking brake is switchedon.● Never engage reverse gear when the ve-hicle is moving.

WARNINGIf the gear is changed down inappropriate-ly by selecting a gear that is too low, youmay lose control of the vehicle, causing anaccident and serious injuries.

CAUTIONWhen travelling at high speeds or at highengine speeds, selecting a gear that is toolow can cause considerable damage to theclutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and heldand it does not engage.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-al; although the pressure may seem insig-nificant, it can cause the premature wear ofthe clutch plate. Use the foot rest when youdo not need to change gear.● Always ensure that the vehicle is com-pletely stopped before engaging the re-verse gear.● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.

206

Start and driving

● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually ››› page 209,Changing gear in Tiptronic mode.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 151 In the centre console: selector lever.

The selector lever position is shown when thecorresponding sign lights up. It is also dis-played on the screen in manual shift positionsM, D, S and E (when the ECO driving mode isselected ››› page 214), the gear that is en-gaged.

– Parking lockWhen the P button is pressed, the drivewheels are locked. Only press P when the ve-hicle is stationary ››› .

To press the P button you must press thebrake pedal simultaneously.

– Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To engage reverse gear R, you must press thebrake pedal simultaneously. The reverselights switch on when the reverse gear R isselected and the ignition is on.

– NeutralIn this position, the gear is in neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever fromN to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or atspeeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› .

– Permanent forward drive positionThe D/S position enables the gears to be op-erated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S).To select Sport mode S, move the lever back-wards. Pushing the lever again will select nor-mal mode D. The selected driving mode isdisplayed on the instrument panel screen.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects thebest gear ratio. This depends on the engineload, the road speed and the dynamic gearcontrol programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for asporty driving style. This setting makes use of »

207

Driving

the engine's maximum power output. Whenaccelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-tain roads) it can be advantageous to switchtiptronic mode ››› page 209, to adapt thegears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lockIn N, the lever lock prevents a gear rangefrom being engaged, and prevents the vehi-cle from moving off accidentally.

Press and hold the brake pedal with your leftfoot with the engine running.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever isin position N the following indication will beshown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quicklythrough position N (e.g. when shifting from Rto D). This makes it possible, for instance, to“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” ifit is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-gages automatically if the brake pedal is notpressed and the lever is in position N for morethan about one second at a speed of lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph).

WARNING● Take care not to press the acceleratorpedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-hicle could start moving immediately (insome cases even if the parking brake is en-gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.● Never move the lever to R position whendriving. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident or failure.● With lever in any position (except P), thefoot brake must be pushed down wheneverthe engine is running. This is because anautomatic gearbox still transmits powereven at idling speed.● While you are selecting a gear and thevehicle is stopped with the engine running,do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. Switch on the electronic parkingbrake and select the parking lock (P).

Note● If the lever is moved accidentally to Nwhen driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling beforeselecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply is interruptedwith the P parking block active, it will not bepossible to move the lever. If this shouldhappen the manual release can be used. In

this case, you should seek professional as-sistance.

Note● If the lever lock does not engage, there isa fault. The transmission is interrupted toprevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-ing. Follow the procedure below in order forthe lever lock to engage again:– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-tion N and subsequently engage agear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-ceed to the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engag-ed. Press the brake pedal and engagethe gear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

208

Start and driving

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode

Fig. 152 Steering wheel: automatic transmis-sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro-gramme, the vehicle remains in the currentlyselected gear. This is possible as long as thesystem is not changing gear automaticallydue to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddlesThe gear shift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S.

● Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 152.● Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand gear shirt paddle towards the steeringwheel for approximately 1 second.

If the gear shift paddles are not operated forsome time, the Tiptronic mode will automati-cally be exited.

CAUTION● When accelerating, if a higher gear is notselected, it will automatically changeshortly before reaching the maximum per-mitted RPM.● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-tem will not change until it detects that theengine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only be started with the leverin the N position and the P button must be litup (the parking lock remains active).

Driving down hillsUnder certain circumstances it may be ad-vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-lect the gear manually according to drivingconditions ››› .

Stop/ParkTo park on flat ground, just press the P button››› Fig. 151. On slopes the parking brakeshould first be applied and then press the Pbutton.

If the driver door is opened and the P buttonhas not been activated, the vehicle couldmove. The following warning is displayed onthe instrument panel: Gear change: se-lector lever in the drive position!.Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhillAlways apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,apply the electronic parking brake ››› .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears isengaged to prevent the car from rollingdownhill ››› .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-tion● Once you have engaged a gear, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and gently press theaccelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Holdfunction● Pull on the electronic parking brake button. »

209

Driving

● Once you have engaged a gear, gentlypress the accelerator and pull on the elec-tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programmeIf all the positions of the lever are shown overa light background on the instrument paneldisplay, there is a system fault and the auto-matic gearbox will operate in with the backupprogramme. It is still possible to drive the ve-hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-lected range of gears. Driving in reversegear may not be possible.

Kick-downThe kick-down system provides maximum ac-celeration when the gear selector lever is inthe positions D, S or in the Tiptronic mode.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayeduntil the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 208.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for long

periods, as the brakes can overheat. Thisreduces the braking power, increases thebraking distance or even causes a brakesystem fault.● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal orparking brake.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.● If you allow the vehicle to roll with thelever in position N and the engine off, theautomatic gearbox will be damaged bylack of lubrication.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, the gears could overheat and bedamaged! If the warning lamp lights up,stop the vehicle as soon as you can andwait for the gearbox to cool ››› page 212.● If the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Launch-control program3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of morethan 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW.

The Launch-control programme enablesmaximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon-nect the traction control (TCS) or activate theESC Sport mode, using the Infotainment sys-tem menu: press the function button >Driver assistance > ESC menu. The warninglamp will stay switched on or will flashslowly depending on whether or not the vehi-cle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) appearson the instrument panel to indicate the deac-tivation status.

210

Start and driving

● With the engine running, disconnect trac-tion control (TCS) or activate ESC Sportmode ››› page 2591).● Press the brake pedal with your left footand hold it down for at least one second.● Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip-tronic, or else select the sport driving modefrom the SEAT Drive Profile* ››› page 214.● With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down position.The engine speed will stabilise at about3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Thevehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the Launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit,and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the TCS and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start to

spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Riskof accident!● After moving off, you should activate theTCS or deactivate the ESC “sport” modeagain using the Infotainment system: func-tion button > Driver assistance.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

Downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when thelever is in the D/S position and the brake isapplied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speedat which the vehicle was travelling when thebrake was applied, within logical limits. It maybe necessary to correct the speed by press-ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as faras 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steepslopes you may have to switch to tiptronicmode and thus manually change down to2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of enginebraking and take the load off the brake sys-tem.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 219, downhill speed control is activa-ted when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannotbe maintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

1) Vehicles without a driver information system:the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with adriver information system: the warning lamp re-mains on.

211

Driving

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certaindistances without using the accelerator,which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia modeCondition: lever in position D, slopes of lessthan 12% and speeds between 20 and 130km / h (12 and 80 mph).

● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-ment panel , the engaged gear and currentconsumption will disappear and the word In-ertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage andthe vehicle will roll freely, without the effect ofthe engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, theengine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertiamode, simply remove your foot from the ac-celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and inertia discon-nection (= shorter section without the need

for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumptionand emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile››› page 214, the inertia mode can be activa-ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. InEco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-ating conditions are met, regardless of thesmoothness with which the foot is removedfrom the accelerator.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “D” or “E” will appearinstead of “D7” or “E7”).● The inertia mode will be automaticallydisconnected on gradients steeper than15%.

● In the case of the TDI, TGI and 2.0l TSI en-gines, the inertia mode will only work in theEco driving mode.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!● The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox tocool with the engine at idling speed and theselector lever in position P. When the warninglamp and the driver message switch off, havethe fault corrected by a specialised work-shop without delay. If they do not turn off, donot continue driving. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the positionP.● There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.● Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

212

Start and driving

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restrictions.Reverse gear disabled● Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D until switch-ing off the engine● Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly● Continue driving at moderate speeds.When the warning lamp switches off, you cancontinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.● If the warning was caused by the tempera-ture of the gearbox, this driver message willbe displayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Gear-change recommenda-tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Fig. 153 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-cator (manual gearbox).

Depending on the equipment on the instru-ment panel screen, a recommendation isshown with the gear that should be engagedto optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, thelever must be in Tiptronic mode ››› page 209.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is engaged. The current gear will bedisplayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec-ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec-ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterWhen the exhaust system detects that theparticulate filter is close to saturation, thissystem’s self-cleaning function recommendsthe optimal gear for that function››› page 291.

WARNINGThe gear change recommendation is anauxiliary function and in no case should bea substitute for careful driving.● Responsibility for selecting the correctgear, depending on the circumstances,rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe recommended gear indication turns offwhen the clutch pedal is pressed or when »

213

Driving

the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-tion.

Steering

Information relating to different ve-hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engineis stopped, it is possible to continue to rotatethe steering wheel as long as the key remainsin the ignition, but more force must be ap-plied.

Progressive steeringDepending on the vehicle’s features, it may ormay not incorporate a progressive steeringsystem.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so muchon parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressivesteering transmits, for example, in bends, asportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-namic driving sensation.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering.Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and in a safe manner.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have thesteering checked.If the warning light does not come on again after re-starting the engine and driving a short distance, it isnot necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re-connected.Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider themessages shown on the instrument panel display.Do not continue driving if the steering column re-mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seekspecialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGNever ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.● If the warning lamps and the correspond-ing messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic, causing serious damage oraccidents and injuries.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

SEAT Driving modes (SEATDrive Profile)*

Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between the Eco, Comfort*, Normal,Sport and Individual profiles and modes,which modify the behaviour of various vehiclefunctions, providing different driving experien-ces.

The Individual profile can be configured ac-cording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

214

Start and driving

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the engineresponds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-celerator being pressed. When Eco mode isselected, the Start-stop function is activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change timing is changed to put thechanges at higher or lower revolutions. Ecomode activates the Inertia function, therebyreducing consumption. The rest of the drivingmodes will activate the inertia use functionwhen the selector lever is not in the S posi-tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-al is released ››› page 212. When the vehicleis turned on again, the function is activatedby default to reduce consumption.

With manual transmission, the Eco modechanges the gear change recommendationsto facilitate more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)*DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-ers to the condition of the road, the driving sit-uation and the selected driving mode. Withinthe Individual profile you can also adjust theDCC level in a customised manner.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-ing message is displayed on the instrumentscreen Fault: shock absorber regula-tion

SteeringPower steering becomes more robust inSport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

Air conditioningClimatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe-cially restricting fuel consumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*Depending on the driving profile, the perform-ance of the ACC varies, to allow more sportyacceleration and braking or a more respect-ful fuel consumption.

ChassisIt adapts the dynamic performance of the ve-hicle, improving corner traction and its turningcapacity based on the chosen driving profile.The setting will appear on models withoutDCC, you can select between Normal andSport.

Setting the driving profile

There are several ways to select a drivingprofile using the Infotainment System:

● Press the function button > SEAT DriveProfile, available profiles will be displayed.● OR: Press the function button > Vehiclesettings > SEAT Drive Profile, available pro-files will be displayed.● OR: Press the function button , slide yourfinger horizontally across the screen to SEATDrive Profile. Press on to change the driv-ing profile or double press on the icon to showthe available profiles.● OR: With the Infotainment System turnedoff, by pressing on the SEAT Drive Profileicon, the available driving profiles will be dis-played.

The icon of the selected profile is displayedat all times in the upper central part of the in-strument panel and on the Infotainment Sys-tem screen when it is turned off ››› page 83.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low stateof consumption, facilitating afuel-saving driving style that isrespectful to the environment.

Convenience

It permits more relaxed andcomfortable driving, for examplefor long motorway journeys. Itsmain characteristic is the softsuspension setting (DCC). »

215

Driving

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi-ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamicperformance in the vehicle, ena-bling the user a more sporty driv-ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

Kick-down*The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration ››› page 210.

If eco mode has been selected in SEAT DriveProfile*, and the accelerator is pressed be-yond a hard point, the engine power is auto-matically controlled to give your vehicle max-imum acceleration.

WARNINGWhen operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the engine is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition was turned off. When re-

started, the engine and the gearbox willstart in their Normal mode. To return the en-gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-lect the corresponding driving profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-fic conditions.● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-innew components.

Running-in the engineA new engine must be driven through a run-inperiod during its first 1500 kilometres (1000miles). During its first few hours of running, theinternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on when all the moving parts have bed-ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, itshould be driven at a moderate speed (espe-cially when the engine is cold) this will reduceengine wear and increase its useful life. Neverdrive at extremely low engine speeds. Always

engage a lower gear when the engine works“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.● Do not force the engine above two thirds ofits maximum speed.● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600to 1000 miles), gradually increase poweruntil reaching the maximum speed and highengine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 308.● Information about brakes ››› page 252.

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres alldepend largely on driving style. Consumptioncan be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-cient driving type. The following section gives

216

Start and driving

you some tips on lessening the impact on theenvironment and reducing your operatingcosts at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-ing situation does not require too much pow-er. The number of active cylinders can beseen on the instrument panel display.››› page 65.

Foresight when drivingIf you think ahead when driving, you will needto brake less and thus accelerate less. Takeadvantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-ever possible, with a gear engaged. Thistakes advantage of the engine braking effect,reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first tosecond gear as soon as possible. Choosingthe right gear enables fuel savings. Select thehighest possible gear appropriate for thedriving situation (the engine should continuefunctioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-ally and without reaching the “kick-down”position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-sion of harmful gases and noise pollutionmultiply as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling isautomatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperaturein order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will returnto a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 310 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. »

217

Driving

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisablemake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%of fuel.

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating*.

Note● If you have the Start-Stop system, it isrecommended that it should not be discon-nected.● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate slip. This causes wear and can dam-age the clutch plate.

● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use thebrake. The fuel consumption will be lowerand you will prevent the clutch plate frombeing damaged.● Use the engine brake on downhills bychanging to the gear that is best suited forthe gradient. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 252.

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission or electrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 203.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 320.

Trips abroad

● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensuredthat lead-free petrol is available throughoutthe journey ››› page 286, Fuel types. Seek in-formation about service station networks sell-ing unleaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourvehicle is not sold and some spare parts maynot be available or the technical servicesmay only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provideinformation about the technical preparationthat your vehicle requires and also aboutnecessary maintenance and repair possibili-ties.

218

Driver assistance systems

CAUTIONSEAT does not accept liability for any dam-age to the vehicle due to the use of a lowerquality fuel, an inadequate service or thenon-availability of genuine spare parts.


Cruise control system(CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.


Introduction

Fig. 154 Instrument panel display: GRA statusindications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Status displayGRA status ››› Fig. 154

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop. »

A

B

219

Driving

CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSIf the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-cle speed downhill, brake and change downa gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarilydisabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic offThe GRA disconnects automatically or istemporarily interrupted:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene, ASR, TCS, etc.● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

C

D

WARNINGUse of GRA could cause accidents and se-vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at aconstant speed maintaining the safety dis-tance.● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-cient, on steep roads, with several bends orin slippery circumstances or on floodedroads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Adapt your speed and the distance to thevehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-er, the condition of the road and the trafficsituation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for other conditions.● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRAcannot maintain a constant speed. Thespeed can increase. In this case, brake andchange down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 155 On the turn signal lever: controls foroperating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the control ››› Fig. 155 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the control ››› Fig. 155 1 to orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem-porarily. The speed is stored.

220


Reinstating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed can beadjusted with button ››› Fig. 155 2 :

● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in the area.● To increase the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 155 2 pressed down inthe area .● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in the area.● To reduce the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 155 2 pressed down inthe area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-cle does not brake actively.

Switching off● Move control ››› Fig. 155 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up grey

The speed limiter is switched on without program-ming the speed

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit-er is active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.


Introduction

Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: indi-cations of the speed limited status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aprogrammed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph)approx. and faster. ››› Depending on the equipment, the speed lim-iter can be operated using the lever of theturn signals ››› page 223 or from the multi-function steering wheel.

Display messages on the speed limiterStatus ››› Fig. 156:

The speed limiter is active. The last speedset is displayed in large figures.The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.The speed limiter is switched off. The totalmileage is displayed. »

A

B

C

221

Driving

Switching between the speed limiter andGRA or ACC (while the speed limiter isconnected)To change between the driving assistancesystems, press button ››› Fig. 157 2 , thenselect with the right thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel in the instrumentpanel menu and press the thumbwheel toconfirm your selection.

It switches between the speed limiter andcruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC).

Going down slopes with the speed limiterIf the programmed speed is exceeded whiledriving downhill, after a short time the controlwarning lamp ››› page 221 flashes and anaudible warning may sound. Brake andchange down a gear.

Temporarily deactivate by pressing theaccelerator downIf the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While cruise control is off,the control lamp flashes .

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con-trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic offThe speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that could neg-atively affect the working order of the limiter.● If the airbag is triggered.

WARNINGAfter use, switch off the speed limiter toprevent the speed being regulated withoutit being required.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter in adverse weath-er conditions is dangerous and can causeserious accidents. Use the speed limiteronly when the condition of the road surfaceand the weather and traffic conditions al-low it.● When driving on a steep gradient, thespeed limiter cannot limit the vehicle’sspeed. This can increase. In this case, brakeand change down a gear.

CAUTIONFor automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter isonly completely switched off when thedriver stops pressing the accelerator orconsciously switches it off.

Note● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versionsand instructions on the display may vary.● If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiterare connected when the ignition is switch-ed off, the assistants will switch it when theignition is switched on, but only the speedlimiter will maintain the last programmedspeed.

222


Operating the speed limiter withthe turn signal lever

Fig. 157 On the turn signal lever: buttons to op-erate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Move control ››› Fig. 157 1 to position and press button 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It doesnot take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter● While driving, press button ››› Fig. 157 3 inthe area .

The current speed is stored as the maximumspeed.

Setting the programmed speedYou can set the speed using button››› Fig. 157 3 :

● Briefly press area to increase speed insmall increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold the area to continu-ously increase speed in increments of 10km/h (5 mph).● Briefly press area to decrease speedin small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold area to continuouslydecrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5mph).

The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter● Move control ››› Fig. 157 1 to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarilyIf you want to temporarily deactivate thespeed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move thecontrol ››› Fig. 157 1 to position orpress button 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac-tivated with the previously programmedspeed by pressing button ››› Fig. 157 3 in thearea .

Emergency brake assistancesystem (Front Assist)*

Introduction

The objective of the system is to preventhead-on collisions against objects that maybe in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-sequences of such impacts.

The function is designed to avoid collisionsagainst:

● Parked vehicles.● Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that aretravelling in the same lane and direction.● Pedestrians and cyclists who transverselycross the vehicle path.

The Front Assist records the mentioned ob-jects by means of a camera on the top of thewindscreen and a radar sensor on the front ofthe vehicle.

Depending on several factors and how criti-cal the situation is, the system operates in astaggered manner.

First informing the driver, and if there is no orinsufficient reaction, then activating an au-tonomous emergency braking or an evasivemanoeuvre as indicated by the conditionsthat will be discussed in the following points. »

223

Driving

The system can be cancelled if the accelera-tor pedal is pressed or the steering wheel isturned firmly.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the Front Assist also includes the followingfunctions:

● Pedestrian protection ››› page 225● Cyclist protection ››› page 225● Dodge assistant ››› page 225● Turn assistant ››› page 225

WARNING● Front Assist is a driving assistance func-tion that can never replace the driver’s at-tention.● Front Assist cannot change the laws ofphysics or replace the driver in terms ofkeeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.● Following a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision where ap-propriate.

Warning levels and brake assist

Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

Front Assist is active between 5 km/h (3 mph)and 250 km/h (155 mph). Depending on dif-ferent conditions (vehicle speed, speed andtype of object recognised, etc.), some of thestages described below are omitted to opti-mise the performance of the system.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects that you are driving tooclose to the vehicle in front, it will warn thedriver with this indication on the instrumentpanel display .

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour, vehicle speed and rela-tive speed between both.

The safety distance warning is active be-tween approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) and 250km/h (155 mph).

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it alerts the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 158.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› in Intro-duction on page 224.

When Front Assist is connected, the indica-tions of other functions on the screen may behidden.

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervenein the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warnthe driver of the imminent danger of a colli-sion.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking in accordance with thecriticality of the situation.

224


Driver emergency brake assistance sys-temIf the driver, after the critical warning, startsbraking but the system detects that the brakeis not being applied with sufficient force, thebraking intensity will be increased. This brakeassist only occurs if the pedal is pressed firm-ly.

WARNING● The system cannot prevent a collision,although it can significantly minimise theconsequences by reducing the speed andthe force of the impact.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the accelerator or moving thesteering wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!

Pedestrian and cyclist recognition

The system recognises pedestrians and cy-clists who travel in the same lane and direc-tion and pedestrians and cyclists who trans-versely cross the vehicle's path.

Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technolo-gy cannot exceed the physically prescribedlimits and works exclusively within the sys-tem’s limits. The responsibility for braking al-ways depends on the driver.

The pedestrian and cyclist recognition cancause undesired warnings and braking inter-ventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or adirty camera field of vision.

Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at anytime.

The pedestrian and cyclist recognition oper-ating speed range is lower than that of theFront Assist.

Dodge assist

Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obsta-cle in critical conditions.

Once the Front Assist has activated a criticalwarning, if the driver intends on dodging theobject, the dodge assist will help correct thetrajectory. The driver must start and finish themanoeuvre, as this is an assistance systemand not an autonomous one.

Front Assist is active between approx. 30km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph).

LimitationsThis system does not react to objects thatcross transversely or to animals. The basiclimitations of the Front Assist must also betaken into account ››› page 226.

Turn assist

Turn assist can avoid a collision with a vehicleapproaching in the opposite direction, bybraking the vehicle itself when the intention isto turn.

This system is active up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

LimitationsThe turn assist function is only available if youhave turned the steering wheel and startedthe turning path. However, after a traffic flowchange from right to left or vice versa, theturn assist will not be available until after awhile (30 minutes or more).

It only reacts to vehicles that are in the pathof the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.).

The basic limitations of the Front Assist mustalso be taken into account ››› page 226.

225

Driving

System limitations

Fig. 159 On the instrument panel display: ini-tial system self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Thus, in certain circumstances,some of the reactions may be inappropriatefrom the driver's standpoint. So pay attentionin order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration. During this phase, theinstrument panel screen will display the fol-lowing indication ››› Fig. 159.

Unrecognised objects● Vehicles travelling outside the reach of thesensors at close range from your own vehicle.

● Vehicles that suddenly change to the laneon which your vehicle is travelling.● Pedestrians that cannot be recognised be-cause they are partially or totally hidden.● Objects such as walls, posts, fences, treesor garage doors.● Loads and accessories of other vehiclesthat protrude over the sides, backwards orover the top.● Vehicles that cross or approach in the op-posite direction.● In the case of pedestrians or cyclists stand-ing or approaching in the opposite direction.

Operating limitations:In the following situations, the Front Assistmay work late or in an undesirable manner.The following icon is displayed (in yellow)in the instrument panel, accompanied by themessage Front Assist with limita-tions.

● If the Front Assist or the front camera aredisabled or broken.● If the radar sensor or the front camera aredirty or covered.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● When pressing the accelerator firmly or atfull throttle.● If the TCS has been disconnected or theESC is activated in Sport ››› page 259 mode.

● If the ESC is adjusting or is broken.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails orsheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● If you are driving through a parking lot.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of dazzling sun or total darkness.● Entrances and exits of tunnels.● In complex driving situations (such as trafficislands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), FrontAssist may issue warnings and intervene inbraking in an unnecessary manner.

Manual activation and deactiva-tion of the function

Fig. 160 On the instrument panel display:Front Assist deactivated indication.

226


Front Assist indicators appear on the instru-ment panel display.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on. At the time of starting theignition, the Front Assist may not be availablefor a short period of time while the systemstarts. During this phase, the instrument panelscreen will display the following indication››› Fig. 159.

When the Front Assist is disabled, so too arethe advance warning and the distance warn-ing functions. SEAT recommends leaving theFront Assist activated except in the situationspresented in ››› page 227.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front Assistcan be deactivated or activated as follows:● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 79.● OR: using the Infotainment system: pressthe function button > Driver assistance >Front Assist ››› page 87.

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-cation ››› Fig. 160 will be displayed on the in-strument panel.

Each time the ignition is switched on, theFront Assist will reappear as active.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The advance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the infotainment system usingthe function button > Driver assistance >Front Assist ››› page 87.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warningactive.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-tem the advance warning function may beadapted in the following modes:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in“Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offThe safety distance warning can be activa-ted or deactivated in the infotainment systemusing the function button > Driver assis-tance > Front Assist ››› page 87.


SEAT recommends having the safety dis-tance warning activated except in the excep-tions described in section ››› page 227.

Activate or deactivate the dodge and turnassistantThe dodge and turn assistance systems canbe activated or deactivated in the infotain-ment system using the function button >Driver assistance > Front Assist ››› page 87.


SEAT recommends having the dodge andturn assistance systems activated except inthe exceptions described in section››› page 227.

Deactivating Front Assist temporarily inthe following situationsIn the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● If the radar sensor or the front camera arefaulty.● If the radar sensor or the front camera havesuffered a violent blow.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. »

227

Driving

● If the radar sensor or the front camera aretemporarily covered by an accessory.● When the vehicle is going to be loaded ontotransportation.● If the windscreen is damaged in an areathat covers the vision of the front camera.

Radar sensors

Fig. 161 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 161 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assistdoes not work. The instrument panel displaysthe following message: Front Assist: Nosensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will be availa-ble again. The message will disappear fromthe screen.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g.guard rails or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor and the front camera should not becovered with adhesives, additional or similarheadlights, as this may negatively affectFront Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, Front Assist operation may be affected.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTIONIf the Front Assist does not work as descri-bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter-venes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have thesystem checked by a specialised work-shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.● Always adapt your speed and distanceaway from the vehicle in front of you at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired by dirt or because the radar sensorhas lost its settings, the system may issueunnecessary warnings and intervene inop-portunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.● If you have the feeling that the radar sen-sor or the front camera are damaged orhave lost their settings, disconnect theFront Assist. This will avoid possible dan-gerous situations caused by the inade-quate operation of the system. If this oc-curs have it adjusted.● The sensor and the front camera may bemaladjusted if they receive an impact. Thismay compromise the system's efficacy ordisconnect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor and the frontcamera require specialist knowledge andspecial tools. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

228


ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-trol*

Introduction

Fig. 162 Detection area.

The ACC is an extension of the vehicle’scruise control function (GRA) ››› .

It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be-tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130mph), and select the desired distance fromthe vehicle in front.

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of thevehicle, keeping a safe distance away fromthe vehicle in front, if there is one, dependingon speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC reduces speed until it is the same asthat of the vehicle ahead and maintains theset distance between the vehicles. It will be

noticeable that there is a displacement of thebrake pedal. Be careful not to position yourfoot under the pedal. If the vehicle ahead ac-celerates, the ACC also accelerates the vehi-cle, going no higher than the programmedtarget speed.

The ACC can brake vehicle until it stopscompletely before a vehicle that stops. Ifyour vehicle is equipped with a manual gear-box, on certain occasions the instrumentpanel may advise you to reduce gear at alower speed (e.g. from 4th to 3rd) and even topress on the clutch pedal.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention promptACC is subject to certain limitations inherentto the system. In other words, in certain cir-cumstances the driver will have to adjust thespeed and the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 230.

WARNINGThe ACC’s technology cannot overcomethe system's inherent limitations or changethe laws of physics. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-

dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or onroads that are steep, with lots of curves orslippery.● Never use ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-signed for use on paved roads only.● ACC does not react when approaching astopped vehicle, such as the end of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-ped at traffic lights.● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-destrian monitoring system is available.The system does not react to animals orvehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-ted, the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off. Switch off the system whenstarting off.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle.● If the instrument panel screen displays adriver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-tance or the speed. »

229

Driving

● The driver should be ready to accelerateor brake at all times.

Note● If the ACC does not work as described inthis chapter, do not use it until it has beenchecked by a specialised workshop. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Maximum speed with the ACC activatedis limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during braking,caused by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument paneldisplay and control lamps

3 Applies to vehicles with analogue instrumentpanel

The speed reduction by the ACCto maintain the distance from thevehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver interventionprompt.

The ACC is not currently availa-ble.

While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engineand start it again. Perform a visual check of the radarsensor ››› Fig. 164. If it is still unavailable, refer to aspecialised workshop to have the system inspected.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmedspeed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC isactive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Status display

Fig. 163 On the instrument panel display: ACC inactive (Standby). ACC active.

Indications on the display ››› Fig. 163:Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-tive and is not regulating your speed.

1

230


Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is activeand is regulating your speed.Distance level 2 set by the driver.ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.Speed programmed with the ACC

NoteWhen the ACC is connected, the indica-tions on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensors

Fig. 164 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

2

3

4

5

6

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 164.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message: ACC:No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage on the screen will switch off and theACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection. This may occur, forexample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. guard railsor sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, ACC operation may be affected. In thisscenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This way you canavoid possible damage. If this occurs haveit adjusted.● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-ly if it receives an impact. This may com-promise the system's efficacy or discon-nect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

231

Driving

ACC operation

Fig. 165 On the multifunction steering wheel:buttons to operate the ACC

When the ACC is connected, the green con-trol lamp will light up on the instrumentpanel, and the programmed speed and ACCstatus will be displayed ››› Fig. 163.

What ACC settings are possible?● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 232.● Setting your speed ››› page 232.● Setting your distance ››› page 232.● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 232.● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 233.● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 233.● Conditions in which the ACC does not re-act ››› page 233.

Connecting and activating the ACCTo connect and activate the ACC, the posi-tion of the gear lever and the vehicle speedmust all be taken into account.

● With automatic transmission, the gear levermust be in position D or S. It can be activatedfrom 0 km/h (0 mph) but the system is auto-matically programmed at a speed of 30km/h (18 mph). Attention, the vehicle maysuddenly accelerate!● To activate the ACC press the button ››› Fig. 165 on the multifunction steeringwheel. At this time, the ACC is not active andthere is no programmed speed.● Then press the button ››› Fig. 165. At thismoment the ACC is activated and the currentspeed and distance are programmed. Thepicture in the box will change to Active mode››› Fig. 163 .● If the vehicle is stopped, first select a speedusing the and buttons.

While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at aset speed and distance from the vehicleahead. Both speed and distance can bechanged at any time.

Setting speed● To programme the speed press the button or up to the desired speed ››› Fig. 163 6 .The speed adjustment is made at 10 km/h(5 mph) intervals.

● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of1 km/h (1 mph), press the button or to de-crease it press button .

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving.

Setting your distance level● To increase or decrease the distance levelpress the button .

The instrument panel screen displays the se-lected distance level ››› Fig. 163 4 . There are5 distance levels to choose from. SEAT rec-ommends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or whiledriving ››› .

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC● To disconnect the ACC, press the button .An ACC deactivated message appears andthe function is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), disconnect it by pressing the but-ton and reconnect it or step on the brakepedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door isopened.

232


Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journeyIn wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions››› .

In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se-lect the distance level when connecting theACC from: Very short, Short, Medium, Longand Very long using the function button >Driver assistance > ACC ››› page 87.

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 214.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected ifany of the following drive profiles are selec-ted in the Infotainment system:

● Normal● Sport● Eco● Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-tings using the function button > Driverassistance > ACC ››› page 87.

The following conditions may lead theACC not to react:● If the accelerator is pressed.● If there is no gear engaged.● If the ESC is controlling.● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available● The system cannot continue to guaranteesafe vehicle detection and is deactivated.The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currentlynot available. No sensor vision● This message is displayed if the radar sen-sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor››› Fig. 164.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep● The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be

guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switchedon.

ACC: only available in D, S or M● Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake applied● The ACC is deactivated if the parking brakeis applied. The ACC is available once againafter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. In-tervention of stability control● The indication is displayed when the elec-tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In thiscase, the ACC is automatically switched off.

ACC: Take action!● The indication is displayed if, when the ve-hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, thevehicle rolls back even although the ACC isactivated. Apply the brake to stop the vehiclefrom moving/colliding with another vehicle.

ACC: engine speed● This indication is displayed if, when theACC accelerates or brakes, the driver doesnot shift up or down a gear in time, whichmeans exceeding or not reaching the permit-ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzerwarning is heard. »

233

Driving

ACC: clutch applied● Vehicles with manual transmission: pressingthe clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con-trol.

Door open● Vehicles with automatic transmission: theACC cannot be activated with the vehiclestationary and the door open.

WARNINGThere is a danger of rear collision when thedistance to the vehicle in front is reducedand the speed difference between both ve-hicles is so great that a speed reduction bythe ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brakeimmediately!● The ACC may not be able to detect allsituations properly.● Stepping on the accelerator may causethe ACC not to intervene in braking. Driverbraking will have priority over interventionby the speed control or adaptive cruisecontrol.● Always be ready to use the brakes!● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.● It is dangerous to activate control and re-sume the programmed speed if the road,traffic or weather conditions do not permitthis. Risk of accident!

Note● The programmed speed is erased oncethe ignition or the ACC are switched off.● When the traction control (TCS) is deac-tivated or else the ESC is activated inSport* Mode (››› page 87), the ACCswitches off automatically.● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,the engine switches off during the ACCstopping phase and restarts for moving off.

Function to prevent overtaking onthe right

Fig. 166 On the instrument panel display: ACCactive, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The ACC has a function to prevent overtakingon the right.

If another vehicle is driving more slowly to theleft of the vehicle, it is shown on the display››› Fig. 166.

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over-taking on the right, and will avoid overtakingbased on speed. The driver can interrupt theintervention of the ACC by pressing the ac-celerator. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

Deactivating the ACC temporarilyin certain situations

In the following situations the ACC should bedeactivated due to the system's limitations››› :

● When overtaking, on closed curves ormountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads orroadwork sections, preventing the systemfrom accelerating to reach the programmedspeed.● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.● When other vehicles are going slower in theleft lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.● In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-cle in front may not be detected.

234


WARNINGIf the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-uations.

NoteIf you do not switch off the ACC in theaforementioned situations, you may com-mit a legal offence.

Special driving recommendations

Fig. 167 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclistahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 168 Vehicle changing lanes. One ve-hicle turning and another stationary.

The ACC has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Certain reactions, under certaincircumstances, may be unexpected or comelate from the driver's point of view. So pay at-tention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following situations require maximum at-tention:

Starting driving after a stationary periodAfter a stopping phase, the ACC may beginmoving when the vehicle in front moves off(vehicles with automatic transmission). Onvehicles with manual transmission, follow theinstructions in the instrument panel ››› .

OvertakingWhen the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle starts to overtake, the ACC acceleratesthe vehicle automatically and thus reducesthe distance from the vehicle in front.

When the vehicle moves to the overtakinglane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches theprogrammed speed.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake pedal or bypressing the button ››› page 232.

Driving through a bendWhen entering or leaving some curves, theradar sensor may cease to sense the vehicledriving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in theadjacent lane ››› Fig. 167 . The vehicle maybrake unnecessarily or stop reacting to thevehicle in front. In this case, the driver has tointervene by accelerating or interrupting thebraking by pressing the brake or pressing thebutton ››› page 232.

Driving in tunnelsWhen driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels. »

235

Driving

Narrow or misaligned vehiclesThe radar sensor can only detect narrow ve-hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-ment when they enter its range ››› Fig. 167 .In these cases, you should brake as necessa-ry.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-riesSpecial loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.SEAT recommends disconnecting it.

Other vehicles changing lanesVehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors. Asa consequence, the ACC will take longer toreact ››› Fig. 168 . Brake yourself as neces-sary.

Stationary vehiclesThe ACC does not detect stationary vehicles,such as traffic jam tails or broken down vehi-cles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 168 . Brake yourself as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your pathThe ACC does not react to vehicles ap-proaching from the opposite direction or ve-hicles crossing your path.

Metal objectsMetal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets usedin road works, can confuse the radar sensorand cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radarsensor operatesIf radar sensor operation is impaired due toheavy rain, mist, snow, mud, dust, insects, etc.,the ACC is deactivated temporarily. A mes-sage will be displayed stating this. If necessa-ry, clean the radar sensor ››› Fig. 164.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage will turn off and the ACC may bereactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection, for example in aclosed car park. SEAT recommends discon-necting it.

Trailer modeWhen driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakesIf the brakes overheat, for example on longand steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-vated temporarily. A message will be dis-played stating this. In this case, adaptivecruise control cannot be activated.

Cruise control may be reactivated once thebrake temperature has dropped. The mes-sage will disappear. If the message ACC notavailable remains on for quite a long time itmeans that there is a fault. Contact a speci-alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.

WARNINGIf you do not pay attention to the Pressthe brake message, the vehicle may moveand crash into the vehicle ahead. Beforedriving off again, check that the road isclear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-stacles on the road. This could cause anaccident and serious injuries. If necessary,apply the brake.

Proactive speed adjustment

Introduction

The proactive speed adjustment adapts thespeed to the speed limitations detected and

236


to the road layout (curves, crossings, round-abouts, etc.).

Proactive speed adjustment is an additionalfunction of the ACC and uses the traffic sig-nal detection system ››› page 71 and thenavigation data of the infotainment system.

Proactive speed adjustment is available de-pending on the equipment, although not in allcountries.

WARNINGThe proactive speed adjustment smarttechnology cannot overcome the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Neverallow the enhanced convenience of thisfunction induce you to take any risk thatcompromises safety. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Always adapt your speed to suit visibility,weather, road and traffic conditions.● Always pay attention to traffic and al-ways keep the vehicle environment in mind.● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself. If the traffic signal detection sys-tem is not working properly or the naviga-tion data is not updated, the speed maychange unexpectedly and suddenly or maynot adapt to the current traffic situation. Inaddition, the speed adjusted by the systemmay not suit your driving style.

● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself. If you drive without any active gui-ded route, if you leave the route calculatedby the navigation system or if the positionof the vehicle cannot be determined cor-rectly because the GPS does not provideaccurate data, the speed may change un-expectedly and suddenly or may not adaptto the current traffic situation.● Always use current navigation data.● Always take into account the maximumspeed allowed. In the case of speed limita-tions that are not included in the navigationdata, the maximum permitted speed maybe exceeded.

NoteAlso note the information related to theACC relevant to safety ››› page 229.

Limitations of the proactive speedadjustment

In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig-nal detection system ››› page 71 and of thelimitations of the ACC, proactive speed ad-justment has the following limitations inherentto the system:

● Proactive speed adjustment only recogni-ses traffic signals that show a speed limita-tion. The proactive speed adjustment does

not take into account, above all, the rules onpriority of passage or traffic lights.● On roads that are not included in the navi-gation data, or that are included with littleaccuracy, proactive speed adjustment is notavailable.● If a speed limitation is notified based on thenavigation data without it being detected bythe traffic signal detection system, the indica-ted speed will be adjusted to the speed thatwas saved the last time.● Proactive speed adjustment is not availablefor speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h(approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen.

Activating the proactive speed ad-justment

In the infotainment system, in the assist serv-ices menu, you can individually adjust thetype of incident the vehicle should react to››› page 87:

● Reaction to a road layout.● Reaction at permitted speeds.

237

Driving

Driving with the proactive speedadjustment

● Connect the ACC ››› page 232.● Adjust distance and speed.● Activate the proactive speed adjustment.

As soon as the system recognises a speedlimitation or a relevant road layout during theroute, a warning will appear on the instru-ment panel display. This warning will indicatethe reason and the speed to which the vehi-cle will adjust due to said limitation.

Adjustment due to a speed limitation.

Adjustment due to a road layout.

In the event of adjustment due to a speed lim-itation, the detected speed will be saved asthe new desired speed. In the event of adjust-ment due to the road layout, the vehicle willaccelerate again after leaving the reason forthe adjustment behind and the speed will beadjustment to that which has been saved.

The speeds indicated for curves depend onthe driving profile ››› page 214.

Interrupting speed adjustment● During the warning, press the button .● During the adjustment, press the button .

Adjust the announced speedThe announced speed can only be adjustedin the event of adjustment due to a speed lim-itation.

Multifunction steering wheel:+ 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC isadjusting- 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC isadjusting+ 10 km/h (5 mph)

- 10 km/h (5 mph)

If you adjust the indicated speed excessively,the proactive speed adjustment is interrup-ted.

Note● When a speed limitation is recognised,the proactive speed adjustment alsoadapts the saved speed even if the ACC isswitched off. However, it will not adjust.● If the speed of travel considerably ex-ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf-fic signal detection system, a relevantwarning is displayed in the instrument pan-el display.● In the event of joining a highway withoutspeed limitation, the recommended speedis automatically saved as the desiredspeed. If for a highway without speed limi-tation a higher speed had already been

+–

previously saved, this is taken instead ofthe recommended speed.

Problems and solutions

A message is displayed indicating thatproactive speed adjustment is not current-ly available or not in your country.● If this message is displayed for a long timeand proactive speed adjustment is availablein your country, contact a specialised work-shop.

NoteDepending on the anomaly in question, ad-ditional information may be displayed inVehicle Status.

238


Lane Assist*

Introduction

Fig. 169 On the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system.

The Lane Assist System helps the driver stayin his/her lane within the physical limits of thesystem. This function is not suitable and is notdesigned to keep the vehicle automatically inthe lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the limits (lanelines) dividing the lanes in which the vehicle istravelling. If the vehicle gets too close to thedetected lane limits, the system alerts thedriver through a corrective motion of thesteering wheel. The driver can cancel thesteering corrective action at any time.

System limitsUse the Lane Assist system only on large,well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow-ing conditions:

● The driving speed allowed is below approx.55 km/h (30 mph).● The system has not detected any lanelines.● On tight bends.● Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by thevery nature of the system. Careless or un-controlled use of the Lane Assist systemmay cause accidents and injury. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness or manoeuvres when driving.● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time. Theresponsibility of staying in the lane is al-ways the driver's.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, road

structures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. Immediately counter any un-wanted intervention of the system.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary ifthe traffic situation permits.● In the following situations there may beundesired interventions of the system or itmay be that the system does not interveneat all. In these situations, special attentionis required from the driver and, where ap-propriate, the temporary deactivation ofthe lane assist warning system:– In very sporty driving situations.– In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition.– When passing through areas undergo-

ing works.– Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds.● Always observe the vehicle surroundingscarefully and drive proactively.● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

239

Driving

Control lamp

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica-tion of the steering.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 170 On the instrument panel display: indi-cations of the Lane Assist System.

Lane line detected. The system inter-venes assisting on the represented side.Lane line detected. The system does notintervene.

Switching the lane assist system on or offIn some countries, the Lane Assist System isalways activated when the ignition is switch-ed on. The connection status is shown in theDriver assistance menu of the Infotainmentsystem or the driver assistance systems menuafter pressing the corresponding button. TheLane Assist system can be activated and de-activated in these menus.

The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35mph) and if it has detected the lane limits(system status: active). The control lamp

1

2

emits a green light. When the system inter-venes by rectifying the direction, the controllamp emits a yellow light.

If the control lamp of the instrument paneldisplay is off, it means that the Lane Assistsystem is connected but not ready to inter-vene or it is disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the systemtemporarily goes into a passive state in orderto allow manual lane change.

An energetic rotation or rectification of thesteering wheel by the driver causes the sys-tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

Driver intervention promptIf the steering is not corrected manually, thesystem prompts the driver through an indica-tion on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, thesystem switches to a passive state.

Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,through an indication on the instrument paneldisplay and acoustic warnings, the driver isalso prompted to drive through the centre ofthe lane if the steering correction lasts morethan reasonable.

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situation could cause steeringwheel vibration:

240


● The lane ceases to be recognised during asudden intervention in the direction of thesystem.

Troubleshooting

Error message, the system disconnects● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 320● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.

System behaviour is different than expec-ted● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.● Do not mount objects on the steeringwheel.

In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe-cialised workshop.

Driving Assist (Travel Assist)

Introduction

The driving assist (Travel Assist) combinesadaptive cruise control (ACC) and adaptivelane guidance. Within the limitations of thesystem, the vehicle can maintain a distancefrom the vehicle in front that is preselected bythe driver and remain in the preferred positionwithin the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.Therefore, carefully read the informationabout the ACC ››› page 229 and the LaneAssist ››› page 239 and take into account thelimitations of the systems and the indicationscontained therein.

Speed rangeTravel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap-prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx.210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case ofthe adaptive lane guidance function, be-tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h(approx. 155 mph). This range may vary de-pending on the market.

Driving with Travel AssistTravel Assist automatically controls the ac-celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering.In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita-

tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be-hind another that stops and automaticallystarts again.

You can override assisted adjustment at alltimes.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted withTravel AssistThe vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if themultifunction steering wheel has the button ››› Fig. 173.

Driver intervention promptIf you remove your hands from the steeringwheel, after a few seconds the system asksyou to take over the steering with an indica-tion on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

WARNINGThe Travel Assist smart technology cannotovercome the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics and it only works within the limits ofthe system. If Travel assist is used negli-gently or involuntarily, it may cause seriousaccidents and injuries. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Bear in mind the system limitations andthe indications regarding the control of theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneAssist. »

241

Driving

● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility isbad, on steep roads, on windy roads or inslippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or onroads where the surface is not firm. TravelAssist has been designed for use on pavedroads only.● Travel Assist does not react to people oranimal or vehicles crossing your path orwhich approach you head-on in the samelane.● Brake immediately if Travel Assist doesnot slow down enough.● Brake immediately when a braking mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen.● Brake when, after an indication to brake,the vehicle rolls without it being desired.● Keep your hands on the steering wheel atall times, to ensure you have control overthe steering at all times. The driver is al-ways responsible for keeping the vehicle inits own lane.● If driver intervention is requested on theinstrument panel display, immediately re-sume control of the vehicle.● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Fig. 171 On the instrument panel display: indi-cation with active adjustment.

Fig. 172 On the instrument panel display: con-trol lamps.

Displays on the screen››› Fig. 171

The adaptive lane guidance function isactive.

1

Adjusted distance.

In addition, depending on the equipment,control lamps indicate the status of the sys-tem on the instrument panel display:

››› Fig. 172Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance functionare active.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol active and adaptive lane guidancefunction passive.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol passive and adaptive lane guidancefunction active.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance functionare passive.Inactive Travel Assist.

2

A

B

C

D

E

242


Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 173 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.

Connecting● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

The control lamp will light up green.The following warning is also displayed onthe instrument panel screen: The Travel Assistmaintains the current speed and the presetdistance from the vehicle in front. At the sametime, if it detects road markings, it keeps thevehicle in the lane by moving the steeringwheel.

Interrupting the adjustment● Briefly press the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The adjusted distance remains saved.

Making other adjustmentsFor all else, Travel Assist is operated like theACC ››› page 232.


Travel Assist is not available or doesnot work as expected

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● There is a fault in the sensors. Check thecauses and solutions described in the ACC››› page 231 or Lane Assist ››› page 241chapters.● The system limits are exceeded.● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

or Taking control of the steering

The warning lamp comes on white or red, de-pending on the urgency of the intervention. Inaddition, a message is displayed.

● You have released the steering wheel for afew seconds. Take hold of the steering wheeland take control of the vehicle.

● The system limits have been reached. Takehold of the steering wheel and take control ofthe vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automaticallyVehicles without Emergency Assist: You havereleased the steering wheel for a long period.

● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialisedworkshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-edlyVehicles without lane departure warning: Youhave turned on the turn signal.

Emergency Assist

How it works

Emergency Assist can detect whether there isinactivity by the driver and can automaticallykeep the car within the lane and stop it alto-gether if necessary. This way the system canactively help avoid an accident or reduce itsconsequences.

Emergency Assist uses the same sensors asAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-sist. Therefore, carefully read the informationabout the ACC ››› page 229 and the LaneAssist ››› page 239 and take into account the »

243

Driving

limitations of the systems and the indicationscontained therein.

If the Emergency Assist detects that the driverdoes not perform any activity, it requests thatthe driver take control of the vehicle. To dothis, it emits optical and acoustic warningsand causes braking jolts. The seat belt istightened (depending on the equipment). Thesystem slows down the vehicle and keeps it inits lane.

You can cancel the adjustment at any timeby moving the steering wheel, over-acceler-ating or braking.

While the emergency assistant is in operation,other road users are warned as follows:

● The hazard warning lights are switched onsoon after.● The horn sounds (depending on the speed).

As soon as the vehicle stops, the following oc-curs:

● All doors are unlocked.● The interior lighting comes on.● Depending on the equipment, an emergen-cy call (eCall) is made.● The electronic parking brake is activated.

Connecting and disconnectingEmergency Assist can be connected and dis-connected in the infotainment system, in theassist services menu ››› page 87.

When connected, the Emergency Assist is on-ly activated if the following requirements aremet:

● The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist areswitched on.● The system has detected a lane delimita-tion line on both sides of the vehicle.


Emergency Assist not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● The field of vision of the camera is dirty.Clean the windscreen.● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter-gent residue or some coating. Clean thewindscreen.● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to accessories or adhesives. Leave thearea around the camera’s field of vision free.

● The camera has been altered or damaged,e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-screen. Check for visible damage.● There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the en-gine and restart it.● If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer-gency Assist and consult a specialised work-shop.

WARNINGThe smart technology fitted into the Emer-gency Assist cannot overcome the limitsimposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Thedriver is responsible for driving the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● The Emergency Assist cannot alwaysavoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-ing. The system could interpret that there isno driving activity.● If the radar sensor or the camera are cov-ered or have been altered or damaged, thesystem may intervene on the brakes or onthe direction in an inappropriate manner.● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

244


WARNINGIf the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-tunely, serious accidents and injuries mayoccur.● If the vehicle behaves differently than ex-pected, interrupt the intervention of theEmergency Assist by over-accelerating,braking or moving the steering wheel.● Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Lane departure warning(Side Assist) with rear crosstraffic alert (RCTA) and dooropening warning (Exit As-sist)*

Introduction

The lane departure warning (LCA) helps de-tect traffic that is at the rear of the vehicle.

The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps thedriver when backing out of a parallel parkingspot and when manoeuvring.

The door opening warning (EWA) alerts theoccupant of a possible danger approaching

from behind when opening or when any ofthe vehicle’s doors are open.

The lane departure warning has been devel-oped for driving on paved roads.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe lane departure warning (LCA) with rearcross traffic alert (RCTA) and the dooropening warning included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the lane departure warning or therear cross traffic alert are used negligentlyor involuntarily. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Bear in mind the control lamps of the lanedeparture warning, the messages on the in-strument panel display, as well as theacoustic signals on the door speakers andact according to what they indicate.● The lane departure warning could reactto any special constructions that might bepresent to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high

or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● The visibility of radar sensors may be af-fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze ordirt, among others. Clean the area in frontof the sensors.● Never use the lane departure warning onunpaved roads. The lane departure warn-ing has been designed for use on pavedroads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● Never use the lane departure warning,the rear cross traffic alert or the dooropening warning if the radar sensors aredirty.● The control lamps of the lane departurewarning may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation.

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space. This may result inthe system disconnecting itself, or at leastpossibly having its functionality diminished.● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The lane »

245

Driving

departure warning's functions may be limi-ted or work incorrectly if other paints areused.

NoteIf the lane departure warning with rearcross traffic alert does not work as descri-bed in this chapter, stop using it and con-tact a specialised workshop.

Control lamp

Fig. 174 Control lamp of the lane departurewarning.

Fig. 175 Control lamp of the lane departurewarning.

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning isactivated and ready to operate, i.e. when activatingthe system.

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warninghas detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane andthe turn signal has been engaged in the direction ofthe detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 239, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-pear even though the turn signal has not been en-gaged (lane departure warning “Plus” ››› page 247).

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-

mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.

If there are no indications from the controllamp of the lane departure warning, thismeans that the lane departure warning hasnot detected any other vehicles at the reararea ››› .

When the exterior lighting is low, the intensitywith which the control lamps come on is dim-med. The user can modify the intensity of thecontrol lamps with up to 5 levels in the info-tainment system menu.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and causeaccidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

246


Lane departure warning (Side As-sist)

Fig. 176 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorzones.

The lane departure warning uses radar sen-sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle››› Fig. 176. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The lane departurewarning will not work at speeds of less thanapprox. 15 km/h (9 mph).

Light indicationThe control lamp provides an indication onthe corresponding side regarding the trafficsituation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed tobe critical. The control lamp of the left-handside ››› Fig. 174 indicates the traffic situationto the rear left of the vehicle, and the controllamp of the right-hand side ››› Fig. 175, indi-

cates the traffic situation to the rear right ofthe vehicle.

Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane de-parture warning free of objects, adhesives orthe likes that may interfere with your visibility.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible fromthe outside ››› Fig. 176. The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 177, ››› Fig. 178. The range to thesides of the vehicle is a bit larger than thewidth of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (ifthere are any), and can also detect station-ary objects such as dividers, and thus give anincorrect indication.

Lane departure warning “Plus”

The Lane departure warning “Plus” function isaccessed by activating the Lane Assist››› page 239 and Side Assist functions. Inthis case, its functions are expanded as de-scribed below.

If there is a possible critical situation when thedriver begins to change lanes:

● The control lamp flashes in the correspond-ing rear-view mirror even though the turn sig-nal has not been activated.● The steering wheel vibrates to warn thedriver of the risk of collision.● Torque is applied to correct the steeringand return the vehicle to its lane.

247

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 177 Schematic representation: Passingsituation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-cation of the lane departure warning in thecontrol lamp on the left side.

Fig. 178 Schematic representation: Situa-tion of an overtaking in the centre lane andthen moving into the right-hand lane. Indica-tion of the lane departure warning in the con-trol lamp on the right side.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the control lamp ››› Fig. 177 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 178 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 177 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 178 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-

erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-played.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the con-trol lamp, because the lane departure warn-ing takes into account the speed differentialwith other vehicles. Thus even though the dis-tance from the other vehicle is identical, theindication will appear sooner in some casesand later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the lane departure warningmay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. I.e. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● in areas with significant gradient changes;● in adverse weather conditions;● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid-ers.

248


Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 179 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert assistant: zone monitoredaround the vehicle while leaving a parkingspace.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensorson the rear bumper ››› Fig. 176 to monitor thetraffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backsout of a parallel parking space or as it is be-ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-bility conditions.

When the system detects a relevant vehicleon the road that is approaching the rear ofthe vehicle ››› Fig. 179, an acoustic alarmmay sound if the relevance so requires it.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal oninfotainment system display. This signal is dis-

played in the form of a red or yellow strip atthe back of the image of the vehicle on the in-fotainment system screen. This strip displaysthe side of the vehicle towards which traffic isapproaching in transverse direction1).

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The parking assistant functionshould not tempt you into taking any risks.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles orpedestrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

249

Driving

Door opening warning (Exit Assist)

Fig. 180 Graphic example

Fig. 181 Door: warning lamp

The door opening warning (Exit Assist) warnsoccupants of a possible collision when open-ing the door when the vehicle is stationary.The system monitors, within the limits of thesystem itself, the rear and side environment ofthe vehicle using the rear sensors ››› Fig. 176.It detects moving objects that approach frombehind, such as cars ››› Fig. 180.

If a critical situation is detected when thedoor is opened, it will be alerted by an acous-tic signal on the door speaker of the corre-sponding side ››› Fig. 181. Additionally, thecontrol lamp of the lane departure warning ofthe corresponding door will flash. If the doorhas already been opened and another roaduser has been detected in a critical situation,the control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing on the corresponding side will light uppermanently.

When you want to access the vehicle for thefirst time, with the doors closed and locked,the function will be available 3 minutes afterthe first opening of any of the doors. Thefunction will continue to be available as longas the vehicle has the ignition connected andis not moving.

After switching off the ignition, the functionwill remain available for approximately 3 mi-nutes. After that time, the control lamps willlight up indicating the deactivation of thefunction.

WARNING● Always pay close attention to the trafficand the surroundings of the vehicle. Thedoor opening warning (Exit Assist) cannotreplace the necessary attention to be paidby the vehicle’s occupants. The responsi-bility for opening the doors and exiting thevehicle always lies with the occupants ofthe same.

● The door opening warning (Exit Assist)operates continuously as long as the vehi-cle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system isdeactivated and the lamps light up briefly.● It is possible that the traffic situation isnot interpreted correctly and you cannotbe aware of all the objects that are ap-proaching, such as pedestrians. Alwaysvisually monitor the traffic and the areasurrounding the vehicle.

WARNINGThe door opening warning (Exit Assist) issubject to system limits and cannot warn ofan imminent collision in all cases:● If your vehicle is too deep in the parkingspace and the adjacent vehicles hide it.● In certain circumstances, objects or peo-ple who approach, e.g. on a bicycle orscooter, are not detected.● The system does not react to stoppedobjects.● The visibility of the radar sensors may beaffected due to leaves, snow, strong hazeor dirt, among others. Clean the area infront of the sensors ››› Fig. 176.

Note● The door opening warning (Exit Assist) isactivated/deactivated in the Driver assis-tance Menu.

250


● The brightness of the door opening warn-ing indication cannot be adjusted.● The system is not available when drivingwith a trailer.

Managing the assist systems

Enabling and disabling the assist systemsBoth the lane departure warning and thedoor opening warning can be activated anddeactivated by accessing the Assist serv-ices menu in the Infotainment system. TheRear cross traffic alert (RCTA) can be found inthe Park Assist Settings menu.

Open the Assistants menu.● Side Assist● Door opening warning

Open the Park Assist > Settings menu.● Rear cross traffic alert

If the verification box on the instrument panelor the infotainment system is checked , thefunctionality will be automatically activatedwhen switching on the ignition.

When the lane departure warning is ready tooperate, the indications in the control lampswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

Automatic deactivation of the lane depar-ture warning (Side Assist)The radar sensors of the lane departurewarning with rear cross traffic alert and dooropening warning will be automatically deac-tivated when, among other reasons, one ofthe sensors is detected to be permanentlycovered. This may be the case if, for example,there is a layer of snow or ice in front of oneof the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

Trailer modeThe lane departure warning, the rear crosstraffic alert and the door opening warning willbe automatically deactivated and will beprevented from reactivating if the factory-mounted tow hook is electrically connectedto a trailer or other similar device.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the lane departurewarning, the rear cross traffic alert and thedoor opening warning are deactivated. Oncethe vehicle trailer has been disengaged, thelane departure warning, the rear cross trafficalert and the door opening warning will returnto the initial state prior to the moment thetrailer was electrically connected.

If the towing hook is not factory-mounted,then the lane departure warning, the rearcross traffic alert and the door opening warn-ing will have to be deactivated manuallywhen driving with a trailer.

251

Driving

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 300 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake ››› page 254.The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

It lights up yellow*

Front brake pads worn.Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 300, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this functionfails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under

certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.● If the lamp * lights up, alone or accom-panied by a warning message on the in-strument panel display, please go immedi-ately to a specialised workshop to checkthe brake pads and to replace them if theyare worn.

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and need tobe “run in” first. However, you can compen-sate for the slightly reduced braking effect byapplying more pressure on the brake pedal.Avoid overloading the brakes while runningthem in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is aparticular problem in urban traffic and shortstretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-

perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may beproduced when braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipersactivated, the brake pads will briefly touchthe brake discs. This takes place, althoughunnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervalsto improve the response time of the brakeswhen they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven forsome distance without using the brakes whenthere is a lot of salt on the road in winter. Thelayer of salt that accumulates on the discsand pads can be removed by gently apply-ing the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rusthas formed on the disks, it is advisable to

252

Braking and parking

clean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply morepressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)The electromechanical brake servo onlyworks when the ignition is switched on andoptimises the force of the foot by increasingthe pressure that the driver exerts on thebrake pedal.

If the electromechanical brake servo is notworking, the brake pedal must be pressed

harder, as the braking distance increases dueto the lack of assistance from the servo brake.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reducedbraking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking dis-tance will increase. Apply and then releasethe brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.

● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air to »

253

Driving

the front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake (EPB)

Fig. 182 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake ››› .

Applying the electronic parking brakeThe electronic parking brake can be activa-ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-cle.

● Pull and hold the button››› Fig. 182.● The parking brake is activated when boththe control lamp of button ››› Fig. 182 and the

red control lamp on the instrument panelare both on.● Release the button.

Disconnecting the electronic parkingbrake● Switch the ignition on.● Press the button ››› Fig. 182. At the sametime step hard on the brake pedal or, if theengine is running, press the accelerator pedalslightly.● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 182 (ar-row) and the red control lamp on the in-strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-ing brake upon moving offThe electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driver'sdoor is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-tened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● In vehicles with automatic transmission: agear range is engaged or the vehicle isswitched to another one and the acceleratorpedal is lightly pressed.● In vehicles with manual transmission: theclutch pedal is pressed fully before startingoff and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-ed.

● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be-ing automatically released by continuouslypulling up the ››› Fig. 182 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy loadis towed ››› page 275.

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when exiting the vehicle in-correctlyIn vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R positionor in the Tiptronic selector gate.● AND: the vehicle is stationary.● AND: the driver door is open.

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when turning the ignition offIn vehicles with manual transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when turning the ignition off. This

254

Braking and parking

function can be deactivated through the Info-tainment system ››› page 87.

Emergency brake functionOnly use the emergency brake function if youare unable to stop the vehicle with the footbrake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 182 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.● To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNINGThe improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances,only the rear wheels brake. Always use thefoot brake.● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and theengine is running. The vehicle could move,even if the electronic parking brake is acti-vated.● When the electronic parking brake isswitched on or off, there is a slight move-

ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not toposition your foot under the pedal.

CAUTIONTo prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply theelectronic parking brake and then removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

Note● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-leasing the clutch and accelerating at thesame time automatically disconnects theelectronic parking brake.● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic park-ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 49.● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.● The system performs automatic and au-dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-cle if some time elapses without the elec-tronic parking brake being used.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 183 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control lamp of the Auto Hold button››› Fig. 183 remains on when the Auto Holdfunction is connected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for exam-ple, when going up a slope, when stopped attraffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-tomatically prevents the vehicle from rollingwhen stationary without pressing the brakepedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, the »

255

Driving

Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the acceleratorpedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.The vehicle moves according to the slope ofthe road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-ditions required by the Auto Hold function isimpaired, it disconnects itself and the button'scontrol light goes out ››› Fig. 183. The elec-tronic parking brake connects automatically,if necessary, to park the vehicle safely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-ary with the Auto Hold function● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on andoffPress the Auto Hold button ››› . The controllamp on the button goes out when the AutoHold function is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengagingthe Auto Hold functionIf the Auto Hold function was switched on viathe Auto Hold button before switching the ig-

nition off, the function will remain on the fol-lowing time the ignition is switched on.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,it will automatically remain off next time theignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects automat-ically if the following conditions are met(all points must be met at the same time››› ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with thebrake pedal on a flat surface or on aslope.The engine rotates “correctly”.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 256, Conditions for keepingthe vehicle stationary with the Au-to Hold function are no longer met.If the engine is running irregularly or ananomaly is detected.If the engine stalls.Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-celerator are pressed at the same time.Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator ispressedAutomatic gearbox: If any of the tyreshas only minimal contact with the

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-tion.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Auto Hold function cannot defy thelaws of physics; it only works within the lim-its of the system. The greater convenienceprovided by the Auto Hold function shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety.● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.● The Auto Hold function cannot alwayskeep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, onslippery or frozen surfaces.

NoteBefore entering a car wash tunnel, alwaysswitch off the Auto Hold function and theautomatic connection of the parking brakewhen switching off the ignition ››› page 254,since if the electronic parking brake is au-tomatically connected, this may lead todamages.

256

Braking and parking

Stabilisation and brake as-sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused bythe system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If theABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or TCS activated.

It lights up

TCS manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 259.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabili-ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicleby braking individual wheels or by reducingthe engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESC isintervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (TCS), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control(XDS) and the tractor-trailer sway mitiga-tion*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle bychanging the torque.

The TCS can be deactivated when wheelspin is desirable ››› page 259.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steer thevehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedalpulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control (TCS)In the event of the wheels spinning, the trac-tion control system reduces the engine tor-que to adapt to the road condition. This helpsthe car to start moving, accelerate or climb agradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch onagain automatically when the brake hascooled down. »

257

Driving

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries ››› page 281.

Electronic engine torque management(XDS)When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higherspeed than the inner wheel. In this way, thewheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.This may mean that in certain situations thetorque delivered to the inner wheel is toohigh, causing the wheels to spin. On the otherhand, the outer wheel is receiving a lowerdrive torque than it could transmit. This cancause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in thiscase the front axle, which results in under-steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effectvia the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the requestedtrajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and isalways active, even when TCS is disconnec-ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-connected.

Multi-collision brakeIn an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident and causingother collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)With the ignition switched on, the electrome-chanical brake servo supports the force ofthe foot by increasing the pressure that thedriver exerts on the brake pedal. After discon-necting the ignition, the assistance of thebrake servo is progressively reduced. Oncestopped, immobilise the vehicle to prevent itfrom moving.

If the electromechanical brake servo doesnot work, the red symbol indicating failurein the brake system appears in the instrumentpanel. When braking with the faulty electro-mechanical brake servo, vibration of thebrake pedal may occur.

If the electromechanical brake servo is notworking, the brake pedal must be pressedharder, as the braking distance increases dueto the lack of assistance from the servo brake.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, TCS, EDS and the electron-ic torque control systems cannot exceedthe limits imposed by the laws of physics.Always bear this in mind, especially on wetor slippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to take

258

Braking and parking

risks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, espe-cially in corners or on a slippery road, or ifyou follow too close behind the vehicle infront of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,EDS and the electronic torque control sys-tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-dents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and TCS will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises due to their operation.● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 80.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, TCS and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting theESC and TCS

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and TCS systems.

The TCS function should only be switched offin situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, thereis the possibility of disconnecting only theTCS or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the TCS● The TCS can be activated or deactivated inthe infotainment system using the functionbutton > Driver assistance > ESC Menu››› page 87. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indication willbe displayed.

When the TCS is disconnected the controllamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in“Sport” mode● The ECS in “Sport” mode can be activatedor deactivated in the infotainment system us-ing the function button > Driver assis-tance > ESC Menu ››› page 87. In vehicleswith a driver information system* the corre-sponding indication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,and the traction control (TCS) interventionsare limited. In addition, the control lamplights up on the instrument panel.

● The ECS Sport or ESC can be activated ordeactivated in the infotainment system usingthe function button > Driver assistance >ESC Menu ››› page 87. The control lampand the ESC OFF text on the instrument panelswitch off.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.

Note● If the TCS is disconnected or the Sportmode is selected, cruise control* will bedisconnected.● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo-rarily reactivated to assist the driver duringbraking and will then switch back to pas-sive mode when the brake pedal is re-leased (depending on the model version).

259

Driving

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 254.● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-tor lever to position P.● Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage thesteering lock.● With a manual gearbox, engage first gearon flat ground and slopes, or even reversegear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.

● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre ofthe road.

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to opendoors or windows. Locked doors hinder thepossibility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Assisted parking system(Park Assist)*

Introduction

The parking assist system is an additionalfunction of the ParkPilot ››› page 267 andhelps the driver find a suitable parking spacefrom among the following types:

● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic-ular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space,● park in a suitable space driving forward onangle partially entering into the selectedparking space. The system will centre the ve-hicle in said parking space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory infotainment system, the front, rear andside areas are represented, and the positionof obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

260

Help with parking and manoeuvring

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detect, atleast correctly, these objects or peoplewearing such clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors may have blindspots in which obstacles and people arenot detected.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space withPark Assist can cause serious injury.● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking spaceuntil the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event ofa collision, for example, when entering orexiting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

not apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– false detections,– loss of sensor visibility.– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Note● In order to guarantee good system oper-ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings. »

261

Driving

● In order to become familiar with the sys-tem and its functions, SEAT recommendsthat you practice operating the Park Assistsystem in an area where there is not toomuch traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assistsystem

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in the frontand rear bumpers, the button to switch thesystem on and off and the messages on theinstrument panel display.

Prerequisites for parking● The traction control (TCS) must be switch-ed on ››› page 259.● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31mph).● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-tres when driving past the parking space.● Space length (parallel parking): vehiclelength + 0.8 meters.● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width+ 0.8 meters.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when parking. The vehicle will per-form an automatic braking only once if thisspeed is exceeded. If you exceed the speed

more than once, the Park Assist systemswitches off.

Requirements for leaving the parkingspace (only for parallel parking)● The traction control (TCS) must be switch-ed on ››› page 259.● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5metres.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist sys-tem.● When exceeding a speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) more than once.● The driver takes control of the steeringwheel.● The parking manoeuvre does not end within6 minutes from the activation of automaticsteering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).

● The TCS is disconnected.● TCS or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button on the infotainment system is pressedagain.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exita parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object present ata distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. Thisway, the system will require fewer manoeu-vres to complete the parking action.

262


Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 275 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turns slow-ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph])for a few minutes may contribute to thisadaptation process ››› in Introduction onpage 261.

Selecting a parking type

Fig. 184 On the instrument panel display: viewof the parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 185 On the instrument panel display: indi-cation of parking modes.

Park assist has the following 3 parking types:

Reverse parallel parking.Reverse angle parking.Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking type after passing infront of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system and af-ter detecting a parking space, the display onthe instrument panel proposes a parkingtype. The Park Assist system selects the park-ing type automatically. The selected type isshown on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 184 and on the Infotainment Systemscreen.

● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 262.● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist sys-tem.● When the system is connected, the symbol on the Infotainment System screen is high-lighted. Additionally, the selected parkingtype is shown on the instrument panel dis-play. You can change the type of parking onthe Infotainment System screen.● If there are more spaces available, anotherspace can be selected by clicking on themon the Infotainment System screen.● Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention to traf-fic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace.

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 262.● Move forward towards the parking spacewhile paying attention to traffic and stop thevehicle with the front part partially inside theparking space.● Press button once in the infotainmentsystem, > Driver assistance > Park Assistsystem. »

263

Driving

● When the system is connected, the symbol on the Infotainment System screen is high-lighted. Additionally, the selected parking

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play without reduced display.

● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261.

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 186 On the instrument panel display: paral-lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park-ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 187 On the instrument panel display: angleparking. Finding a parking space. Parkingposition. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParked vehicleParking space detected

1

2

3

4

Message to parkMessage to press the brake pedalProgress bar

5

6

7

The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 262 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 263.

264


Parking● Look at the display on the instrument panelto see if the space has been detected as “ap-propriate” and if the correct position for park-ing has been reached ››› Fig. 186 or ››› Fig. 187 . The space is considered“appropriate” if the display on the instrumentpanel shows the message to park 5 .● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,engage the reverse gear, or press the button in the infotainment system, > Driver as-sistance> Park Assist system.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261.● Please note the following message: Inter-vention in active direction. Watchyour surroundings!. While you keep watcharound you, carefully start accelerating up tono more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During theparking manoeuvre, the system only takescharge of the steering. You, as the driver,have to accelerate, engage the clutch ifnecessary, change gears and brake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication tomove forward appears on the instrumentpanel display ››› Fig. 186 or ››› Fig. 187 ;OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish-ed message appears on the instrument paneldisplay. The progress bar 7 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 265.

● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: until the symbol goes out on theinstrument panel screen.● Select first gear.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilotsignal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-verse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it centres itin the space ››› Fig. 186 or ››› Fig. 187 .● For best results, wait at the end of eachmanoeuvre until the Park Assist system hasfinished turning the steering wheel. The park-ing manoeuvre ends when a correspondingmessage is displayed on the instrument pan-el and, in some cases, an acoustic signalsounds.

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 186 7 and ››› Fig. 187 7 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of the pro-gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-versing, it decreases downwards.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated prematurelyduring parking, the result may not be thebest.

Leaving a parking space with theparking assist system (only for par-allel parking)

Fig. 188 On the instrument panel display: exita parallel parking space.

Parked vehicleYour vehicle in reverse gearProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto coverMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking space »

1

2

3

4

265

Driving

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 262.

● Press button in the infotainment system, > Driver assistance > Park Assist sys-tem. When the system is connected, the sym-bol on the Infotainment System screen ishighlighted.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the road you will enter when exiting theparking space.● Engage the reverse gear, or press the but-ton in the infotainment system.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 261. Please note the fol-lowing message: Intervention in activedirection. Watch your surroundings!.While you keep watch around you, carefullystart accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h(4 mph). When exiting the parking space, thesystem only takes charge of the steering.You, as the driver, have to accelerate, en-gage the clutch if necessary, changegears and brake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrumentpanel display shows the forward indication.The progress bar ››› Fig. 188 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 265.● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheel

turns; OR: press the brake pedal until thesymbol goes out on the instrument panelscreen.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilotsignal sounds; OR: move forward until the re-verse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it can exitthe space.● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-responding message is displayed on the in-strument panel and, in some cases, anacoustic signal sounds. Take charge of thesteering with the turning angle set by the ParkAssist system.● Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park-ing space.

Automatic operation of the brakesby the parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leavinga parking space, the brakes may activate au-

tomatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit a park-ing space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake thevehicle when faced with an obstacle, brieflyactioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.

266


● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parkingand manoeuvring:

– Plus Parking Aid ››› page 268. It is an assistsystem that provides a visual and audiowarning of obstacles detected in front andbehind the vehicle .

– Rear Parking Aid ››› page 271. An audioassistant that warns of obstacles detectedbehind the vehicle.

WARNING● Always pay attention, by looking directly,to traffic and the area around the vehicle.Assistance systems are not a replacementfor driver awareness. Responsibility alwayslies with the driver.● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not detected. Payspecial attention to children and animals.

● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking distance warning system functionscan be affected by different factors thatcan cause damage:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detectthese objects or people wearing suchclothes correctly.● Sensor signals may be affected by exter-nal sound sources. This may prevent themfrom detecting people or objects.● If the system warns you of the proximityof a low obstacle, please note that afterbeing detected by the system, the obstaclein question may disappear from the meas-urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-er, and the system will no longer warn of itspresence. In certain circumstances, ob-

jects such as high kerbs that could damagethe underside of the vehicle are not detec-ted.● If the parking distance warning system isignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-ble damage.● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● The display on the Infotainment systemscreen shows a slight time delay.● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area;– rough or cobbled surfaces or with long

grass,– external ultrasound sources, such as

other vehicles equipped with ultra-sound systems,

– downpours, heavy snow, hail or denseexhaust gases, »

267

Driving

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– in gradient changes.● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● We recommend that you practice park-ing in an area without traffic.● The volume and tone of the signals andindications can be changed ››› page 271.● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-tem, these parameters can be modified in aSEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 272.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 189 Parking Aid display on the Infotain-ment system screen.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by givingvisual and audio warnings about obstaclesdetected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When anobstacle is detected, it is indicated by audiblesignals and in the Infotainment system››› Fig. 189.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-hicle or behind it by choosing differentsounds.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 mA

0.60 m1.60 m0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop!

If separation is maintained, the warning vol-ume reduces after about 2.5 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Manually connecting and disconnectingthe parking aid● Press the function button > Driver assis-tance > Parking Aid.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Select reverse gear.● OR: if you drive forward at a speed of lessthan 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter anobstacle, it is detected when it is optically ap-prox. less than 95 cm. away, or acousticallyapprox. 50 cm. away. If the automatic con-nection is activated, a reduced display isshown.● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approxdepending on whether or not an obstacle isdetected)

B

C

D

268


Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.● OR: set the selector lever to P in vehicleswith automatic transmission.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.● OR: activate the electronic parking brake.

Change from reduced view to full view● Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle isequipped with a reversing camera.● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approxdepending on whether or not an obstacle isdetected).

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the RVC button on the Infotain-ment System screen1).

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up when the sys-tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-matically, a diagram of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on screen. This functionwill be available unless the user has deacti-vated it.

It only operates every time the speed is re-duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the firsttime.

If disabled using the button in the infotain-ment system ( > Driver assistance > Park-ing Aid) to be automatically activated again,one of the following actions must be taken:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)approx.● OR: move the lever into position P and packagain.● OR: switch the automatic activation on andoff in the Infotainment system.

The automatic activation of the parking aidcan be switched on and off in the Infotain-ment system ››› page 87:

● Switch the ignition on.

● Press the function button > Driver assis-tance > Parking Aid.● Select Automatic activation. If the box ischecked, the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible soundwarning will only be given when obstacles infront are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-prox.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re-verse gear is engaged.

269

Driving

Visual indication segments

Fig. 190 Parking Aid display on the Infotain-ment system screen.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

Grey segments: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.They are also displayed when the elec-tronic parking brake is activated.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

A wake will indicate the anticipated forwardor backward trajectory, depending on the en-gaged gear.

–

–

–

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,the corresponding audible warning willsound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Inthe collision zone, the obstacles are repre-sented in red (including those out of thepath). Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introductionon page 267, ››› in Introduction onpage 267 !

Setting the indications and audiosignals

The indications and acoustic signals are setin the Infotainment system: function button > Driver assistance > Parking aid:

Setup

Automatic activa-tion On/off

Front volume* Volume in the front and reararea.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Adjust volume

When the parking aid isswitched on, the volume ofthe audio source will be re-duced, depending on the se-lected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inthe areas A and B are displayed››› Fig. 189. If a front sensor is faulty, only theobstacles in the areas C and D will be dis-played. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

On vehicles with a factory-mounted trailerhook, when the trailer is connected, the rearsensors will not activate when reverse gear isengaged or button is pressed in the Info-tainment system ( > Driver assistance >Parking aid). Therefore, any objects behindor to the side of the vehicle will not be indica-ted on the screen and no audio signals willsound.

The screen will only display objects detectedat the front, and the vehicle's trajectory willbe hidden.

270


Manoeuvre braking function*

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking when itdetects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path thatcould cause a collision, driving forwards or inreverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid isactivated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5 and 7 km/h (between 1.5 and 4mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and 7km/h (between 1 and 4 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function is setin the Infotainment system: function button > Driver assistance > Parking aid.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that ap-pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info-tainment system.

● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an optical and audi-ble assistant that warns of obstacles locatedbehind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible and visible warningson the Infotainment system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 321.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

● Side area: 0.60 m● Central area: 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 267,››› in Introduction on page 267!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.

Parking Aid connection● Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.● OR: set the selector lever to P, N or D in ve-hicles with automatic transmission.

Setting the indications and audio signalsThe indications and acoustic signals are setin the Infotainment system: function button > Driver assistance > Parking aid.

Setup

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Adjust volume

When the parking aid isswitched on, the volume ofthe audio source will be re-duced, depending on the se-lected option.

Error messagesIf a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired. »

271

Driving

Towing deviceIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected, the parking aid will not be activa-ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Reverse Assist (Rear ViewCamera)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING● The reverse assist does not make it possi-ble to precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-tem's own limits, hence its negligent usemay cause serious accidents and injuries ifused without due care. The driver should beaware of his/her surroundings at all timesto ensure safe driving.● The camera lens expands and distortsthe field of view and displays the objectson the screen in a way that is different fromreality. Distance perception is also distor-ted.● Due to the screen resolution or light con-ditions, some items may be blurry or notdisplayed at all. Take care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not beseen on the screen and could damage thevehicle.

● The reverse assist has blind spots whereit cannot see people or objects. Monitor thevehicle's surrounding area at all times.● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding areaat all times.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images are only two-dimensional.Protruding objects or holes in the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the guide lines. The width representedby the lines decreases with vehicle load.Pay special attention to the surroundingswhen the inside of the vehicle of the lug-gage compartment are loaded.● In the following situations, objects or oth-er vehicles appear to be further away orcloser than they actually are. Pay specialattention:– If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orthat protrude from it. These objectsmay be outside the camera angle whenreversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if the driver is not familiarwith the system.● The reverse assist reference lines disap-pear when the rear lid is open.

Introduction

Fig. 191 In the rear bumper: location of the re-verse assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver with reverse parking or ma-noeuvring ››› Fig. 191.

The camera image is viewed together withorientation lines projected on the Infotain-ment system screen. Part of the bumper canbe seen at the bottom, which can be used bythe driver as a reference point.

272


Reverse assist modesDepending on the equipment, the followingmodes are available:

● Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic-ular to the road.● Assistance function for hitching a trailer:helps to hitch a trailer.● Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans-verse direction.

Connecting and disconnecting

Connect the reverse assist● Select reverse gear.● OR: in the infotainment system select >Driver assistance > Parking aid.

Disconnect the reverse assistDrive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

Shown on the display

The system’s functions and representationsmay vary depending on the equipment.

The assistant's image view changes when thefactory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con-nected to a trailer ››› page 282.

Reverse assist functions and symbolsWhen the reverse assist is connected, youcan make adjustments using the function but-tons. Some adjustments are equipment-de-pendent.

Exit the current display

Switch to angle parking ››› page 274

Switch to the trailer hitching assistancefunctionSwitch to cross traffic

Adjust the display: brightness, contrastand colour.Switch to park assist ››› page 267

Display/hide the parking aid view

Guide linesGreen horizontal lines: extension of the vehi-cle.

Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on thesteering angle.

Assistance function for hitching a trailerOn vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de-vice, this function can be used to move thevehicle close to a tow bar.

Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainmentsystem.

|

Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. Thedistance between the lines is approx. 0.25 m

Orange line: precalculated direction of thetow hitch depending on steering wheel rota-tion.

Cross trafficThis visualization helps to monitor traffic be-hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam-ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits.

Requirements

To park with reverse assist, the following re-quirements must be met:

● Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h(9 mph).● Parking space width: vehicle width + 0.15m (excluding mirrors).

To display a real image, the following require-ments must be met:

● The luggage compartment rear door isclosed.● The surroundings are on a flat surface.● The vehicle should not be loaded veryheavily at the rear.

273

Driving

Parallel parking

Fig. 192 Display on the Infotainment systemscreen.: parking with reverse assist.

Key to the Fig. 192:Finding a parking spaceGo to the selected parking spaceCentre the vehicle inside the parkingspaceRoadParking spaceLateral boundary of the parking spaceRear boundary of the parking space

1

2

3

4

Parking● In the infotainment system select > Driv-er assistance> Parking aid before passing infront of the selected parking space.● With reverse assist connected and in work-ing order, press the function button .● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace ››› Fig. 192 2 .● Reverse while turning the steering wheel sothat the yellow lines enter the parking space.The green and yellow lines must match theside boundary lines 3 .● Stop the vehicle when the red line hasreached the rear boundary 4 .


The system behaves differently than ex-pectedThere can be several causes:● The camera is dirty ››› page 322. In addi-tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can bereduced by detergent residue or any type ofcoating.● The system requirements must be met››› page 273.● The camera is covered with water.● The factory-fitted towing bracket must notbe electrically connected to a trailer››› page 282.

● The vehicle has some type of damage inthe camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-pact.● The field of view of the camera is blockedby an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys-tem.● Changes have been made to the paint inthe camera area, or structural modificationshave been made to a component such as therunning gear.

Camera with no visibility, fault message,the system disconnects● Clean the camera or remove possible ad-hesives or accessories from it ››› page 322.● Check for visible damage.

Possible solution● Temporarily disconnect the system.● Check if one of the causes indicated abovehas occurred.● Once the source of the problem has beeneliminated, the system may be reconnected.● If the system still behaves unpredictably,have it checked by a specialised workshop.

274

Towing bracket device*


Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspondingtechnical equipment. This additional load hasan effect on the useful life, fuel consumptionand vehicle performance and in some casescan reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle, and thus more concentrationfrom the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on boththe vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-ted on the coupling deviceThe maximum vertical load technically per-mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towingbracket's tow ball is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. Nospecial characteristics need to be taken intoaccount.

If the system does not recognise the trailer orthe trailer bracket has not been retrofitted bySEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-nected by pressing the corresponding buttonin the lower part of the centre console beforedriving with the trailer, and it should remainoff for the rest of the journey ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maximumpermitted trailer weight, you can then climbcorrespondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-gine performance and the ability to climbslopes, the tow load decreases proportional-ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-bination must be reduced by 10% for every1000 m of altitude. When possible, operatethe trailer with the maximum authorised

drawbar load on the ball joint of the towingbracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-it.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hook when you are not using a trail-er.● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle. »

275

Driving

WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at morethan 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the correspondingcountry, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop

system must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 91. Otherwise, the tilt sensor couldcause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 216.● SEAT recommends that, if possible, thetow hook be removed or covered when it isnot going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the tow hook is fitted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, thetowing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-mounted with atowing device meet all the technical and le-gal requirements for driving with a trailer››› page 282.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by SEAT forthis vehicle. Always check and take into ac-count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-structions. Never fit a towing bracket “withweight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper or tothe area where the bumper is mounted. Thetowing bracket should not impair the bum-per's function. Do not make modifications orrepairs to the exhaust system or the brakesystem. Make regular checks to ensure thatthe towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load on theengine and cooling system. The cooling sys-tem should have sufficient coolant and be

276


prepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cableAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 277.

Trailer tail lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 277.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,additional mirrors will have to be installed inaccordance with the regulations of the coun-try in question. The exterior mirrors should beadjusted before you start driving and mustprovide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could becomedetached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 193 Schematic representation: assign-ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock-et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10 »277

Driving

Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the connection between the trailerand the vehicle. With the engine running,electrical devices on the trailer receive powerfrom the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected, the consumers on the trailer willreceive electricity through this connection(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.This powers, for example, the trailer's interiorlighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge ina caravan only receive electrical power if theengine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3,pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow cableThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to ensurethey are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations. Ifyou connect the trailer to the factory-moun-ted system, when you turn on the rear foglamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle willturn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp.

Include in the anti-theft alarmThe trailer is included in the anti-theft systemif the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tiltsensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected whenhitching the trailer, this will automaticallyswitch to the Normal profile. If the systemcannot detect the attached trailer or if thetowing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-to repair shop other than SEAT, you mustmanually select the Normal profile beforeyou start driving with a trailer attached. To re-connect the Eco profile once the trailer hasbeen unhitched, switch the ignition off andback on once.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.

278


● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or fail-ure of the lighting system, and consequent-ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-er socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in

the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-spected by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery will dis-charge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle can tow››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex-erted vertically from above on the hook of thetowing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model, whichmay be lower than these figures, are given inthe vehicle documentation. The information inthe vehicle documentation takes precedenceat all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-mends making the most of the maximum ver-

tical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 275. An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly. »

279

Driving

Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 310.

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight, themaximum load technically permissible onthe coupling point, the maximum author-ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailerare exceeded, accidents and serious inju-ries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum per-missible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-ity and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Specific features of driving with a trailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight of thetowing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-tance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-vantage of the braking power provided by theengine. Otherwise, the braking system couldoverheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-bination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, change the centre of gravity and theproperties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the traileris loaded, then the load distribution is incor-rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly andwith extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.● Press the button once to disconnect theelectronic parking brake ››› page 254.● If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, push the clutch pedal all the waydown.● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-lector lever to position D/S ››› page 206.● Pull out the button and hold it in that po-sition to immobilise the towing vehicle andtrailer with the electronic parking brake.● Release the brake pedal.● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case ofa manual gearbox, slowly release the clutchpedal.● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle andserious injury.

280


● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change thevehicle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-cles with a trailer, as it could be lower thanfor vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailercombination is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is weav-ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of thetrailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-tion requirements● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.● The ESC and TCS are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentcluster.● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-cle through the trailer power socket.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is not being exceeded on the cou-pling device.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equippedwith a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced safety provided by the elec-tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-er should not lead you to take any risks thatcould compromise your safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the vehicleand trailer may not correctly detect alldriving conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light trailers, so it may not stabilisethese correctly.● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,the trailer can even interfere with the sta-bility system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over without having previously weaved.● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.installation of a bicycle rack with lights),repeated automatic braking may occur inextreme driving conditions.

281

Driving

Electrically unlocking trailerhook*

Description

Fig. 194 On the left side of the luggage com-partment: button for unlocking the tow hook.

The towing bracket’s hook is located in thebumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlockingcannot be removed.

There should be no person, animal or objectin the path of the tow hook ››› .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronicparking brake ››› page 254.● Switch off the engine.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the button ››› Fig. 194 briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically and automatically

turns outwards. The button's control lampflashes.● Finish remove the tow hook by hand untilyou feel and hear that it has engaged andthe control lamp on the button stays on.● Close the rear lid.● Hitching and connecting a trailer››› page 277.

Retracting the tow hook● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronicparking brake.● Switch off the engine.● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-cal connection between it and the vehicle. Ifyou are using an adapter, remove it from thetrailer's power socket.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the button ››› Fig. 194 briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically.● Turn the tow hook under the bumper withyour hand until you feel and hear that it en-gages and the control lamp on the button re-mains on continuously.● Close the rear lid.

The control lamp ● If the warning light on the button ››› Fig. 194 flashes, this means that the tow hook hasnot been attached properly or is damaged››› .

● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 194 remainson with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor-rectly in place both when extracted andwhen covered.

The control light of the lamp switches off ap-proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-gaged.● Always ensure that no person, animal orobject is to be found in the path of the towhook.● Never use a tool or instrument while thetow hook is moving.● Never press the button ››› Fig. 194 whenthere is a trailer hooked to the vehicle orwhen a carrier system or other accessoriesare mounted on the tow hook.● If the tow hook is not attached properly,do not use it. Instead, go to a specialisedworkshop and have the towing bracketchecked.● If you detect any fault in the electricalsystem or in the towing bracket, contact aspecialised workshop and ask them tocheck it.● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49mm at any one point, do not use the towingbracket under any circumstances.

282


CAUTIONIf you clean the vehicle with high-pressureor steam devices, do not point the jet di-rectly towards the retractable tow hook orthe trailer power socket, as this may dam-age the joints or remove the grease neces-sary for lubrication.

NoteAt extremely low temperatures, the towhook may be impossible to operate. In thiscase, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-tion (for example, a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-tractable towbar

The maximum allowed weight of the carriersystem, including the load, is 80 kg. The car-rier system should not protrude more than700 mm backwards from the spherical head.Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikescan be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-cles must be mounted as close to the vehicleas possible (tow hook).

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-cycle rack mounted on the tow hook cancause accidents and injury.

● Never exceed the maximum weight or thelimits indicated above.● The bicycle rack may not be mounted tothe neck of the hook below the ball be-cause, due to the shape of the neck anddepending on the rack model, the rackcould be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-cle.● Always read and take the manufacturerassembly instructions into account.

CAUTIONIf the maximum weight and limits indicatedabove are exceeded, the vehicle may suf-fer considerable damage.● Never exceed the values indicated!

NoteSEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-sible, all removable parts of the bicyclesbefore setting off. These parts include, forexample, baskets and saddlebags, childseats or batteries. This improves aerody-namics and the centre of gravity of the racksystem.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 195 Limits and attachment points for ret-rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For »

283

Driving

example, it may very well be necessary toadjust the cooling system or mount thermalprotection plates. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ballhead and the road ››› Fig. 195 C must neverbe less than that indicated. This also applieswhen the vehicle is fully loaded, including thetechnically permissible maximum verticalload on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 195:Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-cle)65 mm (minimum)350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)1057 mm344 mm314 mm (Leon) / 602 mm(Leon Sports-tourer)

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctionsin the entire vehicle electronic system, aswell as to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the taillights or any other unsuitable power sour-

A

B

C

D

E

F

ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-nect the trailer.● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note● Only use towing brackets that have beenapproved by SEAT for the model in ques-tion.● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-tional towing hook solution is not recom-mended. Please consult your TechnicalService.

284

Checking and refilling levels

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev-els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 196 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 196.● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon asthe pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuelsupply. Do not try to put in more fuel after thenozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansionchamber in the fuel tank.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 286.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 334.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-bridsEvery 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-rol until the control lamp switches off, andthen the tank must be refilled. This is neces-sary to ensure that the system works proper-ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-ing with petrol.

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine andturn off the ignition for safety reasons.

● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-ter in the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-cle. In an accident the canister could bedamaged and could leak.● If, in exceptional circumstances, youhave to carry a spare fuel canister, pleaseobserve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.This could cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident! »

285

Practical tips

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. Thecatalytic converter can be damaged.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched on forat least 30 seconds before starting the en-gine. When you then start the engine it maytake longer than normal (up to one minute)to start firing.

For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from special-ised personnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.

● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 197 Identification of fuels according to Eu-ropean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols onthe pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. Theidentification serves to prevent confusionwhen choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol3 Applies to: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

1

2

3

1) Depending on country286


(E10)1) . The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes atleastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged. Exception:vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 287,Ethanol fuel.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher than theone required by the engine can be used.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel3 Applies to: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-gines2) by label on the fuel tank lid with withthe marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run withunleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any highpercentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that ››› page 286, Type of pet-rol »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.2) This motor is only available in some markets.

287

Practical tips

NoteSEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-crease impurities that using E100 ethanolfuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel3 Applies to: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according tostandard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-tures, thus affecting the start or operation ofthe engine. Ask your service station attendantif their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-arator, the instrument panel may display thefollowing warning: Water in the fuelfilter. If this is the case, take the vehicle toa specialised workshop so that they candrain the fuel filter.

CAUTION● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,heating oil, other fuels or thinning agentsas they can cause severely damage thefuel system and the engine.● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do notstart the engine under any circumstances.Risk of damaging the fuel system and theengine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue®

Information about AdBlue®

The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13°F). The system has heating elements thatguarantee its operation even at low tempera-tures.

The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-mately 11 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km theinstrument panel screen displays a messagerequesting an AdBlue® refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warninglamp will come on when the remainingrange is less than 1000 km. . The indica-tion that in XXX km it will no longer be possibleto restart the engine will appear on the instru-ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, whenremaining range of 0 km is displayed, it willno longer be possible to restart the engine.The red warning lamp will light up .

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTIONFilling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

Control and warning lamps

It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue levelis too low.Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area thentop up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue››› page 289.

1) Depending upon country.288


and They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in theAdBlue system.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low.Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) thatare indicated ››› page 289. SEAT recommends con-tacting a specialised workshop.

and They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitableAdBlue fluid has been used.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

Several warning and control lamps shouldlight up for a few seconds when the ignition isswitched on, signalling that the function is be-ing verified. They will switch off after a fewseconds.


Fill AdBlue®

Fig. 198 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refillingPark the vehicle on a flat surface and turn offthe ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on acurb, the level indicator may not detect therefill properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (ap-prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amountwill the system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottleOnly use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 198.

● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.● Check the expiry date.● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fillerneck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquidcomes out of the bottle.● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-nition.● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine! »

289

Practical tips

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlueValid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 198.● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNINGAdBlue® should only be stored in the origi-nal container, which should be tightlyclosed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzlewill not connect automatically.● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time.The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBluecould spill out.● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-ditives. Any type of damage caused bysuch a mixture will not be covered by thewarranty.

● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.This could result in engine damage.● Do not carry the refill bottle inside thevehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-ture changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of the refill bottle in an environ-ment-friendly manner.

NoteYou can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships .

Engine management andemissions control system

Introduction

WARNING● Due to the high temperatures reached bythe exhaust gas scrubbing system, youshould not park your vehicle near a surfacethat can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 291.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (ElectronicPower Control) lights up and should go off once theengine has started.

It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system.The engine can be started straight away when thelamp switches off.

290


Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

NoteWhile the control lamps , , or areon, there might be faults in the engine, fuelconsumption may go up and the enginemight lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines.● Never run the fuel tank dry.● When changing or adding engine oil, do notexceed the necessary amount ››› page 297,Topping up the engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 49.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven runningor loss of power when the car is moving, havethe vehicle inspected by a specialised work-shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptomsoccur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel canenter the exhaust system and escape into the

atmosphere. The catalytic converter can alsobe damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause an irregular fuel supply can causeignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel toenter the exhaust system, which couldcause overheating and damage the cata-lytic converter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the gases on occasions. Thisdepends on the sulphur content of the fuelused. This can quite often be avoided bychanging to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter3 Applies to: vehicles with petrol or diesel partic-ulate filters

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. Ifthe filter does not clean itself (e.g. if shortjourneys are made continuously), it becomesblocked with soot and the following indica-tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-late filter: cleaned while the vehi-

cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil-ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)Requirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› ● Completely remove your foot from the ac-celerator pedal for a few seconds to let thevehicle roll with the gear engaged.● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and letroll) until the control lamp turns off.● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.

This procedure involves an autonomous par-ticulate filter cleaning process and may takesome time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-mediately to a specialised workshop to repairthe fault.

Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filterRequirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h(31-75 mph). This increases the temperatureand burns the soot in the filter ››› . »

291

Practical tips

● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● End the regeneration journey once the con-trol warning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutesof running in regeneration mode, have a spe-cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNINGAlways adjust your speed to suit the weath-er conditions, roads, braking distance andtraffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-eration phase. Route recommendationsshould never make you disregard eachcountry's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION● When the exhaust system detects thatthe particulate filter is close to saturation,the self-cleaning function of this systemrecommends optimal driving for this func-tion.● Due to the high temperatures caused bythe regeneration of the particulate filter, itis possible that the radiator fan will acti-vate after stopping the engine, even it itsoperating temperature has not beenreached.● Noise, smells and high idle speeds canoccur during regeneration.● Always use the correct engine oil and thecorrect fuel to make sure the useful life of

the particulate filter is not affected. Alsoavoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart-ment

Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed belowand follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-tentially hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGWhen work is done in the engine compart-ment, injuries, burns, accidents and evenfires can occur.● Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni-tion e and apply the electronic parkingbrake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox,place the lever in neutral; if it has an auto-matic gearbox, press button P. Wait for theengine to cool down.● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Wait until no steam

or coolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.● Keep children away from the enginecompartment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the pointswhere the jump leads are attached››› page 49. The battery could explode.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by cover-ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for

292


securing the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal,safety risk from the rotating parts, such asthe drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,and from the high-voltage ignition system.You should also observe the following:– Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even ifthe handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi-cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-vironment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in aspecialised workshop.

NoteIn right-hand drive vehicles* some brakefluid reservoirs are on the other side of theengine compartment ››› Fig. 201.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 199 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 200 Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen. »

293

Practical tips

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 199 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left onthe lever located under the bonnet, in thecentre ››› Fig. 200 2 . The arrester hooks arereleased.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.

● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGMake sure that the bonnet is properlyclosed. If it opens when driving, it cancause an accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

294


Checking levels

Fig. 201 Diagram for the location of the various el-ements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank ››› page 298Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 297Engine oil filler cap ››› page 297Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 300Battery ››› page 302Windscreen washer reservoir››› page 301

1

2

3

4

5

6

NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be doneby a technical service or specialised work-shop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change: »

295

Practical tips

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.Diesel engines: standard VW 509 00,VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00could increase consumption and the vehicle’sCO2 emissions.

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil toguarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*Only VW 509 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 297 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil(once) conforming to the specificationsVW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)››› page 295.

–

–

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type ofService

Specifica-tion

With particulatefilter (DPF)a)

Set Serviceand FlexibleService Inter-vals

VW 509 00

Without particu-late filter (DPF)

Set ServiceIntervals

VW 505 01b)

VW 506 01b)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you maydamage the engine.b) If the quality of the fuel available in the countrydoes not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine oil pressure too low.Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom-panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add moreoil ››› page 297.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil levelis correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity todo so ››› page 297.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-til then it is advisable to check the oil level every timeyou refuel.


296


Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 202 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until theoperating temperature is reached and thenstop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 202. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 292.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Con-tact a Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 203 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Working in the enginecompartment on page 292.

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 203.● Carefully add oil in small quantities (nomore than 0.5 l).● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever youadd a certain amount, wait about 2 minutesand recheck the oil level ››› page 297.● If necessary, add some more oil.● When the oil level reaches at least zone››› Fig. 202 B , unscrew the engine oil fillercap carefully ››› . »

297

Practical tips

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 295.

Engine oil specification ››› page 296.

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 202 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 202 A . Otherwise oil can be drawnin through the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 292.● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such addi-tives would not be covered by the factorywarranty.

For the sake of the environment● We recommend that you change the en-gine oil and the filter at a technical servicecentre.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough to holdall the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may be

298


increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theadditive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 204 In the engine compartment: markingon coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 205 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 295.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks››› Fig. 204. When the engine is hot, it maybe slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down. »

299

Practical tips

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professionalassistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-cialised workshop to have the cooling systemexamined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the car in a safe place and donot continue driving. Obtain technical as-sistance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 206 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 295.

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display monitorsthe brake fluid level ››› page 80.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-tem. These bubbles can significantly re-duce braking power, notably increasingbraking distance, and could result in the to-tal failure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard.

300


● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT OfficialService. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925CLASS 4 standards, or USA StandardsFMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the windowwasher tank and refilling it

Fig. 207 In the engine compartment: windowwasher tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the enginecompartment ››› page 295.

Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washercontains the cleaning fluid for the wind-screen, the rear window and the headlightwasher system*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 292.● The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap.

● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion ofmixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 334.

CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, it mayfreeze on the windscreen and rear window,reducing forward and rear visibility.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you have »

301

Practical tips

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. Thiscould lead to flocculation and may blockthe windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Lack of window washer fluid causes theview through the windscreen to be ob-scured.

Battery

12-volt battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Always follow the instruction manual.

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare lost. These functions will require resettingafter the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve-hicle on-board network, disconnect first thenegative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periodsThe vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 305.Some functions, such as the interior lights, orthe remote door opening, may be temporarilydisabled to prevent the battery from runningflat. These functions will come back on assoon as the ignition is switched on and theengine started.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ›››

302


WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injuryand chemical burns as well as the risk ofaccident or fire when working on the bat-tery and the electrical system:● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes onthe skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. Ifacid is swallowed by mistake, consult adoctor immediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and bat-teries.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.

When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnectthe battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect firstthe positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flatbattery can also freeze at temperaturesclose to 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.

● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

48-volt battery

Fig. 208 48-volt battery

Never expose the 48 volt battery to sour-ces of fire, sparks or unprotected flames.The instruction manual and the workshopinformation contain further informationand warnings to this regard.Always keep children away from the 48volt battery.If the 48-volt battery is damaged, fluidcan leak and very corrosive acids canform. Always handle the battery withcare. »

1

2

3

4

303

Practical tips

All maintenance works involving the high-voltage battery should only be performedby duly qualified and trained technicalstaff .Take care when handling flammable sub-stances.

In addition to a 12-volt battery, the vehiclemay be fitted with a 48-volt battery.

The works that are to be carried out on the48 volt battery should be performed exclu-sively by a specialised workshop with dulyqualified technical staff, trained according tothe SEAT guidelines.

Overview of the 48 volt system

The 48 volt system consists of the followingcomponents, among others:

● 48-volt battery● Electronic power module● Purple 48 volt cables and connectors

48 volt battery warning signs

There is a hazard warning sign on the 48 voltbattery ››› Fig. 208.

WARNINGAn inappropriate handling of the 48 voltbattery can cause serious injuries or death.● All maintenance works involving the 48volt battery should only be performed byduly qualified and trained technical staff .

5

6

● Never make any changes to the 48 voltbattery.

WARNINGMake sure the 48 volt battery does notcome into contact with water or other flu-ids.● Liquids may cause short circuits, electri-cal shocks and burns.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Checking the battery electrolytelevel

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

● Open the bonnet and then lift the coverthat protects the front part of the battery››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 292.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment diagram››› page 295.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.● Transparent/light yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised work-shop.

304


Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the batteryshould be checked by a specialised work-shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled environ-ment.

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility, thesize and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. SEATrecommends you have the battery replacedby a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 203) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 305.The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used is ofthe same make and type as the original fittedbattery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded to thepower management mode at a specialisedworkshop.

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free bat-teries that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in 12-volt battery on page 303.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must be

disposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting ca-pacity

The power management controls the distri-bution of electrical energy and thus helps toensure that there is always enough poweravailable to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life of thebattery.

The main functions incorporated in the powermanagement system are battery diagnosis,residual current management and dynam-ic power management. »

305

Practical tips

Battery diagnosisThe battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sensorsdetect the battery voltage, battery currentand battery temperature. This enables thesystem to calculate the current power leveland charge condition of the battery.

Residual current managementThe residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the battery di-agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power managementWhile the vehicle is moving, this function dis-tributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alterna-tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-mum possible battery power level.

Note● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and use-ful life of the battery are limited.● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure orlow battery charge level warning lamp willbe shown ››› page 80.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. Inthese conditions a large amount of power isconsumed, but only a small amount is sup-plied. The situation is also critical if electricaldevices are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-odsIf you do not drive your vehicle for a period ofseveral days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of

current they are using. This limits the amountof power consumed and helps to ensure reli-able starting even after a long period. Someconvenience functions, such as remote vehi-cle opening, may not be available under cer-tain circumstances. These functions will berestored when you switch on the ignition andstart the engine.

With the engine switched offFor example, if you listen to the sound systemwith the engine switched off the battery willrun down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is runningAlthough the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven. Thiscan occur when a lot of power is being con-sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off the elec-trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

306

Wheels

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-ing systems in particular use a large amountof electrical power. If you notice, for instance,that the seat heating* or the rear windowheater is not working, they may have beentemporarily switched off or regulated to alower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electri-cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power require-ment and charge the battery at the sametime.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important››› page 310.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected. »

307

Practical tips

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 41. Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre treadwraps around the foreign body and provision-ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This makes surethat optimal use is made of tyre properties interms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noiseand wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 270 km/h (168 mph)max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. Thismay cause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop

PQRSTUHVZWY

the vehicle immediately and check thetyres.● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special tools andthe corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If youhave installed new tyres, drive the first 500km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-cialised workshop before purchasing them››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity

308

Wheels

or COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country of res-idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form thenormal wheels — e.g. in the case of wintertyres or particularly wide tyres — the sparewheel should only be used temporarily in theevent of a puncture, and the vehicle shouldbe driven with care. Refit the normal roadwheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheelsmust be fitted with tyres of the same brand,type and tread so that the traction system isnot damaged by a difference in the numberof turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the eventof a puncture, only a spare wheel with thesame perimeter as normal tyres should beused.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved bySEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-aged, causing an accident.● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. Whenselecting replacement tyres, do not relyentirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damagethe tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-danger road safety. Risk of accident!● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out aboutthe combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.309

Practical tips

Tyre life

Fig. 209 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 209.● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 314.

● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left door frame››› Fig. 209.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 209.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18), inflate to apressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyrepressure label ››› Fig. 209.

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-ficial Service.

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels andtyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.

310

Wheels

● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-ted to the right pressure. The recommen-ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 209.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressureshould be that indicated on the label››› Fig. 209.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type oftyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 210 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 211 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 210. The letters "TWI"

or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre markthe position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundTo ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 211. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible andbe approximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

311

Practical tips

and when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.● The speed has to be adapted according-ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel nuts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel nuts* ››› page 44.

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel nuts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nutsis too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel nutsand threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 47 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left door frame››› page 310.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-

pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's documents(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).The vehicle documentation varies dependingon the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 308.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-ice and specialised workshop. Please notethe regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.312

Wheels

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weightsfor your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Fuel consumption, wear and noiseswhile driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the frontwheels, even on vehicles with four-wheeldrive.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having fitted the chains, it is best to disa-ble the traction control (TCS) in the ESC››› page 259, Connecting and disconnect-ing the ESC and TCS.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

195/65 R15 ET43 Chains with links of maximum15 mm


225/45 R17 ET46 Chains with links of maximum9 mm225/40 R18 ET46


Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims before fittingsnow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive onroads without snow. Otherwise they will im-pair vehicle handling, damage the tyresand wear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contact »

313

Practical tips

with them. SEAT recommends the use ofcovered snow chains.

Tyre pressure monitor sys-tem

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is muchlower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre hasstructural damage.In addition, a audible warning sounds and a textmessage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replaceany damaged tyres.

Flashes

System faultThe control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minuteand then lights up permanently.If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition offand on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitorindicator ››› page 314. If the fault continues, go to aspecialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre pressure monitor system

Fig. 212 Instrument panel: warning of loss oftyre pressure.

The tyre pressure monitoring system com-pares the individual speeds of each wheeland thus the dynamic radius with the help ofthe ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator will indicate this on the instru-ment panel through a warning lamp and awarning to the driver››› Fig. 212. When onlyone specific tyre is affected, its position withinthe vehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread changeThe wheel diameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is changed manually.● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre pressure monitoring indicator or it maynot indicate anything under certain circum-stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered orunpaved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-dicatorAfter changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do thesame, for example, when the front and rearwheels are swapped.

314

Wheels

● Switch the ignition on.● Memorise the new inflation pressure in theInfotainment system: function button > Ve-hicle info > Vehicle status ››› page 87 .

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before calibra-tion ››› Fig. 209.

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre pressure monitoring system canonly operate correctly if all of the tyres areinflated to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyre

checked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-ted with the ignition on, an audible warningwill sound. In the event that there is a faultin the system, an audible warning willsound.● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempo-rarily deactivate the TPMS. The controllamp shows a fault, but disappears whenroad conditions or the driving style change.● Do not only rely on the tyre pressuremonitoring system. Regularly check yourtyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor-rect and that the tyres are not damageddue to puncture, cuts, tears and im-pacts/dents. Remove objects from thetyres only when they have not pierced thetyres.● The tyre pressure monitoring indicatordoes not function when there is a fault inthe ESC or ABS ››› page 257.

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 213 In the luggage compartment: loadfloor raised. »

315

Practical tips

Fig. 214 In the luggage compartment: removethe subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked and replaced assoon as possible at a SEAT Official Service orat a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for aspare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel● Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› page 132.● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise.● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-woofer)*To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get itout.● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggagecompartment as explained in ››› page 132.● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 214 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 214 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rim withcare. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that thesubwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace thepunctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the backof the left front door frame ››› Fig. 209.● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off during the journey. Switch off thesystem when starting off.

316

SEAT Maintenance Programme

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro-gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main-tenance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In-tervals

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service.. »

317

Maintenance

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 296.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate whenyou have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 296.

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However,a fixed service may affect service costsThe Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service interval display on the in-strument panel ››› page 76 or in the Vehiclesettings menu of the infotainment system››› page 87.

The service interval display gives informationfor service dates that involve an engine oilchange or an inspection. When the time forthe corresponding service comes, additionalwork required, such as the change of brakefluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil

318

SEAT Maintenance Programme

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Have the services conducted at author-ised SEAT services or specialised work-shops.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (depending onthe conditions of use and the features ofthe vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, oroperating fluids). Maintenance services aredivided into inspection and review services.Consult the details of the jobs required foryour vehicle at:

● Your SEAT authorised service● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your SEAT authorised service orspecialised workshop is always receiving up-dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additionalservice to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspection »

319

Maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For furtherinformation ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notaim the jet directly to the side window gas-kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner.

320

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreenwipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-structions of the car wash tunnel operator,especially if your vehicle has detachableparts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-ployed electrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have »

321

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.Take he general considerations into account››› in Take special care with... onpage 325.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 320

322

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand suitable stain remover forleatherDry stains: grease solventspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather »

323

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question.

324

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditionssuch as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 302.

Accessories and modifi-cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT OfficialService has the latest information from themanufacturer and can recommend accesso-ries and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally. »

325

Maintenance

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damagecaused by modifications and/or work per-formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service us-ing genuine SEAT parts®.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle without

326

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

327

Information for the user



Information stored by thecontrol units

Storage of accident data (EventData Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whetherthe systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist).● Park Pilot system● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident inves-tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials.

328


● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron-ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehicle mustbe marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270 »

329




Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQ37W

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU



Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated indashboard moduleinstrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B



Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.2253V5.035.577.A7N0.035.552.J7N0.035.552.K7N0.035.552.Q5F4.035.2255F4.035.225.A5F4.035.225.B5F9.035.2255F9.035.225.A5F9.035.225.B575,035,225575.035.225.A575.035.225.B5FJ.035.2255FJ.035.225.A5FJ.035.225.B

Mobile phone anten-na amplifier

4N0.035.456.D4N0.035.456.E

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

330


include a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 982205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra »

331



Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambraand Tarraco

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco and Leon




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

111-120 kHz 10 W New Leon

332



Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de-clares that the radio equipment type LTE-MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara-tion of conformity is available at the followinginternet address:

http://www.molex.com/doc

333

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about thetechnical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die-sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.


Vehicle ID numberThe vehicle ID number can be found in thefollowing places:

● In the infotainment system using the func-tion button > Interior > Instrument panel> Service.● One the vehicle's data label.● In front, under the windscreen.● To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’s righthand door frame. Vehicles for certain exportcountries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each indi-vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-mental conditions, load or number of passen-gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

45 l, 7 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised load on the roof ofyour vehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment canincrease the empty weight, which means that

334

Indications about the technical data

the possible useful load decreases propor-tionally.

Trailer weightThe maximum permitted drawbar load on theball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

335

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.5 Start-Stop ACT® 1.5 Start-Stop ACT®

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 96 (131)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000 250/1,500-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,498

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 203 (V&VI) 215 (V) 213 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.4 8.2 8.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,780 1,790

Diesel engines 2.0 TDI Start-Stop 2.0 TDI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/2,750-4,250 110 (150)/3,000-4,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 300/1,500-2,500 360/1,700-2,750

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 197 (V) 211 (VII)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 8.4

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,870 1,890

336

Indications about the technical data

Dimensions.

Fig. 215 Leon

Fig. 216 Leon Sportstourer »

337

Technical data

››› Fig. 215››› Fig. 216 LEON LEON Sportstourer

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 888 / 794 888 / 1,068

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,686 2,686

D Length (mm) 4,368 4,642

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,545 / 1,516 1,545 / 1,516

G Width (mm) 1,800 1,800

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,456 1,456

Turning radius (m) 11.2 11.2

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 195/65 R15 ET45.

338

Index

IndexAABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230function to prevent overtaking on the right . 234indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

AdBluecontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Adjustfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Android Auto™

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Apple CarPlay

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 260Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79door opening warning (Exit Assist) . . . . . . . . . 245driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 223lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 245

339

Index

parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 71speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 255Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 111Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . 209tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

BBackrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 142Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . . 283max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 295

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

CapacitiesAdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Caresee Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-

cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Check lists

requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . 172requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . 171requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Childproof lockselectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Child seatsgroup classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

340

Index

securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 320special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Clocksset the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 259fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 246lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 291press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 285replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 259tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Controls and displaysoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cooling systemcheck the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 153

DDangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . 168Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 65Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Diesel

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Disposalseat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

341

Index

Drink holderbottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Driversee Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 218with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Ee-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Easy Open

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

EDLsee Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Electricwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 201Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 257Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 244problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Emergency braking assist systemactivating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226dodge assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224pedestrian and cyclist recognition . . . . . . . . 225radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227turn assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Emissions control systemAdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203start (driver instructions with the mechani-

cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

342

Index

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 199emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 200switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 295battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 299engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Engine failurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine oilchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 298checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 296

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Entertainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Equipmenttelephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

ESCelectronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 257multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326external audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Filling capacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 115Four-wheel drive

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 223Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Fuel consumptioninertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . 290

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

343

Index

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 57recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

GGear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Gear change

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

HHandbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

IIdentification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Identifying letters on engine (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . 67Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 153

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 159customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Infotainment systemsee Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 317Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 79use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

344

Index

KKeyless Access

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 94

Keysassign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90instructions for the driver (mechanical con-

tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 100vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Lane departure warning Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . . 210Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Leaving a parking space with the parking as-sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ambient light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . . 115headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Loading the luggage compartmentfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 128positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 135

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 128electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137opening and closing controlled by sensors

(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 132variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 132

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 132Luggage net

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

345

Index

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 260clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182MirrorLink®

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Mirrorsadjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

NNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190enter an address for a guide destination . . . 188favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 189navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 191saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189use the map to enter the destination . . . . . . 189

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 137Noise

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 312

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

OOctane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102rear lid with electric opening and closing . . 103tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

346

Index

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Operating faultautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Operation in winterbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 120salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

PPainting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As-sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260at an angle with the reverse assist . . . . . . . . . 274automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 271surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 265leaving a parking space (only when paral-

lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271

Parking ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268, 271Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Power socket

12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Power socketstrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Power steeringsee Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Preheating systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

RRadar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 231Radio

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179TP (Traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

347

Index

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 245Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 245, 249

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 106

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 103Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Rear seat

fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 127Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273cross traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273hitching a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 74Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

SS-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Save fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 22safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

348

Index

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Selector lever (automatic transmission)

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 209Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Special characteristics

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 282MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . 205driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 203the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217active cylinder management status (ACT) . 65

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 66ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 66identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 207service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 69

Steeringcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Steering wheeladjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 209

Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

349

Index

on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Storage compartment accessoriessee Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Storing objects

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 135

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Switching offtelephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

TTail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59TCS

see Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Telephone

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Temperature indicatorexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Timeadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 74

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 207, 209To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278

Tow hookcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Towing devicefitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 282

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

TP (Traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Traffic programme

see TP (Traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 272power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

350

Index

retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 278trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 282vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 275, 279

Trailer modesee Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . . 135Travel Assist

see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tyre pressure monitor systems

Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Tyresaccessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

UUnlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 132Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . 94vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Vehicle batteryassisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 302electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Vehicle carewiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Volumeset for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

351

Index

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 320high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 320sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 312

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Wheelschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 46changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Window washerwindow washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Window washer watercheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Winter conditionssunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Wiper and rear window wiper blades

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 322replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

352

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.01.20


Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Leon

5FA012720BA

Ingl

és 5

FA01

2720

BA (

01.2

0)

SEA

T Le

on I

nglé

s (0

1.20)

(01.20) Owner’s manual Leon SEAT Leon SEAT · 2020-04-22 · want to give you valuable advice and...

Documents

Transcript of (01.20) Owner’s manual Leon SEAT Leon SEAT · 2020-04-22 · want to give you valuable advice and...